298
(Edition 03.2018) Chapter "Battery, General Information" Chapter "Battery Types" Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" Chapter "Battery Post/Terminal" To guarantee a long service life, the Battery - A - must be checked, serviced and maintained as described in this manual. The Battery - A - supplies the power to start the engine. The Battery - A - also acts as a power reserve for the entire vehicle electrical system. Refer to Self Study Program No. 234: Battery. In order to prevent damage to the Battery - A - or vehicle, note the information about the battery types. Refer to Chapter "Battery Types" . NOTE CAUTION https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia 1 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    4

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

(Edition 03.2018)

⇒ Chapter "Battery, General Information"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Types"

⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Post/Terminal"

To guarantee a long service life, the Battery - A - must be checked, serviced and maintained as described in this manual.The Battery - A - supplies the power to start the engine. The Battery - A - also acts as a power reserve for the entire vehicleelectrical system.

Refer to Self Study Program No. 234: Battery.

In order to prevent damage to the Battery - A - or vehicle, note the information about the battery types. Refer to ⇒ Chapter"Battery Types" .

NOTE

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

1 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 2: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

⇒ Chapter "Battery with Standard Color Display"

⇒ Chapter "AGM Battery"

⇒ Chapter "EFB Battery with Enhanced Visual Indicator"

Battery with »Standard« Color Display

Maintenance-Free Battery - A - with Fluid Electrolyte (Wet Battery).

Do not remove any of the labels on the battery and do not add any distilled water. Only perform a visual inspection. Note thechapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking" .

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

This Battery - A - has a color display (visual indicator). The colors in the visual indicator show the Battery - A - charge and

WARNING

CAUTION

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

2 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 3: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

electrolyte level.Visual Indicator, Checking. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Color Display (Visual Indicator) in Battery Cover, Checking" .All tests can be performed on these batteries using approved battery chargers. Observe the settings on the battery charger. Referto ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking" .

AGM Battery

Maintenance-free Battery - A - with Fixed Electrolyte (AGM battery) without Color Display

Do not remove any of the labels on the battery and do not add any distilled water. Only perform a visual inspection. Note thechapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking" .

Lead-acid battery, where the electrolyte is fixed in an absorbent glass mat (AGM). The Battery - A - is closed and equipped withbreather valves.“AGM” is the English abbreviation for »absorbent glass mat«.These Batteries - A - cannot have a visual indicator due to the fixed electrolyte. The AGM abbreviation is on the Battery - A - toidentify it.An AGM battery must be replaced with another AGM battery.All tests can be performed on AGM batteries using the approved battery chargers. Observe the settings on the battery charger.Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking" .

EFB Battery with »Enhanced« Visual Indicator

Maintenance-Free Battery - A - with Fluid Electrolyte (Wet Battery).

Do not remove any of the labels on the battery and do not add any distilled water. Only perform a visual inspection. Note thechapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking" .

CAUTION

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

3 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 4: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

The Battery - A - is installed in certain Stop/Start vehicles due to special requirements. “EFB” is written on the battery cover toidentify this battery.“EFB” is the English abbreviation for »Enhanced Flooded Battery« (enhanced wet battery).An EFB battery must only be replaced with another EFB battery.An EFB battery has a visual indicator for checking the electrolyte level.

EFB batteries are being installed in smaller gasoline engines with a Stop/Start system and a manual transmission starting from05/2011.

Visual Indicator, Checking. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Color Display (Visual Indicator) in Battery Cover, Checking" .All tests can be performed on EFB batteries using the approved battery chargers. Observe the settings on the battery charger.Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking" .

⇒ Chapter "Hazards when Handling Batteries"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Safety Label"

⇒ Chapter "Working on the Airbag System"

Hazards when Handling Batteries

WARNING

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

4 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 5: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Recognizing and Preventing RisksBatteries - A - present risks. Read the warnings on the Battery - A - label, in the Owner's Manual and in ELSA to prevent theserisks.

Supervised personnel, such as a trainee or an apprentice, may only perform work on vehicle Batteries - A - under supervisionof technical personnel, for example, a master automotive technician or a master automotive electrician.Acid has strong corrosive properties. If Batteries - A - are handled inappropriately, there is a risk that personal injury mayresult from exposure to harmful electrolyte influences. Therefore, suitable remedies for acidic chemical burns must be keptreadily available. Soapy water is a suitable remedy.If electrolyte drips out from the Battery - A - , skin can be burned by acid and the vehicle may be affected by acid erosion andcorrosion. It is a possibility that safety-related vehicle components can be damaged.When charging and when resting after charging, explosive electrolytic gas is present. In extreme cases when the Battery - A - is handled inappropriately, the emitted gases may cause the battery to explode.Replace the Battery - A - if the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. These cannot be tested or charged and ajump start cannot be given. There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.Producing sparks by grinding, welding, cutting and open flames, (also from smoking near the battery) is forbidden. Producingsparks through electrostatic charge must also be avoided. Always touch the vehicle body before touching the Battery - A - .Only perform Battery - A - procedures in suitable and well-ventilated areas.

Battery Safety Label

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

5 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 6: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Safety Label on the Battery - A -

When handling and working on the Battery - A - , fire, sparks, openflame and smoking are prohibited. Avoid generating sparks whenworking with cables and electrical devices and from electrostaticdischarge. Avoid short circuits. For this reason, tools must not be placedon the Battery - A - .

1.

Wear protective eyewear when working on the Battery - A - .2. Always keep acid and Batteries - A - out of the reach of children.3. Disposal: old batteries are hazardous waste and require special disposal.They may only be disposed of at a suitable collection facility and onlyaccording to the legal regulations.

4.

Do not dispose of old batteries in household waste.5. There is a risk of explosion when handling Batteries - A - . Charging theBattery - A - produces a highly explosive gas mixture.

6.

Always follow instructions for the Battery - A - in the Parts Catalog andthe Owner's Manual.

7.

Danger of burns: battery acid is severely corrosive, therefore protectivegloves and eyewear must be worn when working on the Battery - A - .The Battery - A - must not be tipped because acid may spill from theventilation openings.

8.

Working on the Airbag System

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

6 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 7: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

When working on the airbag system (pyrotechnic components, Airbag Control Module - J234 - , wiring), the ground cable mustbe disconnected when the ignition is switched on.

Exceptions: on vehicles with a battery in the vehicle interior, the ignition must be switched off.

Then cover the negative terminal.Wait for 10 seconds after disconnecting the battery.The ignition must be on when connecting the battery.There must be no one inside the vehicle when connecting the battery.

If this is the case, make sure to stay out of the airbag deployment and belt tensioner zones.

If the ignition is not switched on after the battery is reconnected - the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster do not turn on - theignition (key/button) may be switched on while sitting in the driver seat with the seat all the way back.

In order to prevent damage to the battery terminal clamps and battery terminals, observe the following:

Never use force to attach the battery terminal clamps by hand.Do not apply grease to battery terminals.The battery terminal clamps should be mounted so that the battery terminal sits flush with the clamp or protrudes out of it.After tightening the battery terminal clamps to the tightening specification, the threaded connections must not be tightenedagain.

Terminal clamp tightening specification. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment; Rep. Gr.27 [Battery; Overview - Battery] .

WARNING

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

7 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 8: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Different Types of Batteries, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Visual inspection"

⇒ Chapter "Notes for Battery Replacement and Battery Venting"

⇒ Chapter "Color Display (Visual Indicator) in Battery Cover, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A - "

⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester - VAS6161 - "

⇒ Chapter "Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - , USA/Canada only"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Test with Vehicle Diagnostic Tester"

⇒ Chapter "Current Draw Test"

⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking Resting Voltage, Vehicles in Storage or Inventory"

⇒ Chapter "Battery with Color Display (Visual Indicator), Checking"

⇒ Chapter "AGM Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "EFB Battery, Checking"

Battery with Color Display (Visual Indicator), Checking

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

8 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 9: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Check in the following sequence:Visual inspection. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Visual inspection" .

Color display test

3 colors. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "3-Color Color Display, Checking, through 03/2008" .

2 colors. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "2-Color Visual Indicator, Checking, from 04/2008" .

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

The Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A - is no longer used for warranty testing. Only the Battery Tester - VAS6161 - is stillbeing used.

Battery load test using

Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Load Test" .

Battery Tester - VAS6161 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester - VAS6161 - " .

Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - (USA/Canada only). Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - ,USA/Canada only" .

Depending on the result of the battery load test, perform a “current draw test”. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Current Draw Test" .

WARNING

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

9 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 10: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

AGM Battery, Checking

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Check in the Following Sequence:Visual inspection. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Visual inspection" .

The Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A - is no longer used for warranty testing. Only the Battery Tester - VAS6161 - is stillbeing used.

Battery load test using

Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Load Test" .

Battery Tester - VAS6161 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester - VAS6161 - " .

Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - (USA/Canada only). Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - ,USA/Canada only" .

Depending on the result of the battery load test, perform a “current draw test”. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Current Draw Test" .

EFB Battery, Checking

Risk of injury! Observe all warning messages and safety precautions.

WARNING

NOTE

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

10 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 11: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Check in the Following Sequence:Visual inspection. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Visual inspection" .

Color display test

3 colors. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "3-Color Color Display, Checking, through 03/2008" .

2 colors. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "2-Color Visual Indicator, Checking, from 04/2008" .

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

The Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A - is no longer used for warranty testing. Only the Battery Tester - VAS6161 - is stillbeing used.

Battery load test using

Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Load Test" .

Battery Tester - VAS6161 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester - VAS6161 - " .

Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - (USA/Canada only). Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - ,USA/Canada only" .

Depending on the result of the battery load test, perform a “current draw test”. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Current Draw Test" .

WARNING

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

11 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 12: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Before any extensive measurements are taken, visually inspect the exterior of the battery, the connections, and the secureinstallation of the Battery - A - .Observe the battery chapter for the respective vehicle. Refer to ⇒ Booklet .

An improperly secured Battery - A - can lead to damage.Excessive vibration due to an improperly secured battery will reduce the battery service life, creates a risk of explosion, candamage the pasted plates, and the battery bracket could damage the battery housing.Make sure the Battery - A - is secure. If required, tighten the bolt to the tightening specification.

Visual Inspection Points:Damage to the battery housing. Acid can leak out if the case is damaged. Battery acid that has leaked out can cause severedamage to the vehicle. Acid that has leaked onto any part of the vehicle should be immediately treated with acid neutralizer orsoap solution.

Damage to the battery terminals. If the battery terminals are damaged, the necessary contact with battery terminals clampscannot be guaranteed. When connecting the battery terminal clamps, always use the tightening specification from thecorresponding vehicle repair manual. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment; Rep. Gr.27 [Battery; Overview - Battery] . If the batteryterminal clamps are not correctly installed and secured, the wiring may burn. Substantial malfunctions to the electrical systemare a consequence. Safe operation of the vehicle can no longer be guaranteed.

Damage to the gas breather hose and the plugs. On vehicles with batteries in the vehicles or luggage compartment pay attention tothe correct securing of the gas breather hose. Pay attention that no open vent opening is located in the area of the positiveterminal. If in this area a vent opening is open, it must be closed with a plug. The vent opening must be connected in the area of thenegative terminal on the opened vent opening. Pay attention to the chapter. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Notes for Battery Replacement

WARNING

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

12 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 13: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

and Battery Venting" .

On which side the battery is engaged is safety-related.

In use cases in which a gas breather hose is used, pay attention to the correct seating of the gas breather hose and the ventopening are secured on the other side.

When replacing the vehicle battery pay attention to that there is no open bleed hole in the area of the positive terminal. If in thisarea a bleed hole is opened, it must be closed with a plug and the bleed pipe must be opened in the area of the negativeterminal.

On vehicles with AGM battery and the installation outside of the engine compartment, make sure that the battery is replacedwith an AGM battery.

If a protective cap with a sprayed plug is located on the positive terminal of the original battery 000.915.105.DX with theexception 000.915.105.DN and all economy batteries with a simple index, it must be inserted after the use case accordingly onthe negative or positive terminal side. The list of the batteries can be found here. Refer to ⇒ Anchor .

All AGM, EFB+, EFB batteries and the 36AH batteries with the original number 000.915.105.DN, replaced for example in up!and Polo have a protective cap without a sprayed protective cap on the positive terminal. Here the degassing of the positiveterminal side is already closed.

If an original replacement battery with the following part numbers is found, on either the plus or negative terminal a red plug mustbe inserted. If this is not inserted this must be subsequently installed to TDC. Number.: 000.915.506

List of the Batteries with Protective Cap and Sprayed Protective Caps

Original Wet Cell Battery:“110 Ah” 000.915.105.DL

“95 Ah” 000.915.105.DK

“85 Ah” 000.915.105.DJ

“80 Ah” 000.915.105.DH

“72 Ah” 000.915.105.DG

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

13 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 14: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

“61 Ah” 000.915.105.DE

“51 Ah” 000.915.105.DC

“44 Ah” 000.915.105.DB

Economy Batteries:“44 Ah” JZW.915.105.C

“61 Ah” JZW.915.105.

“72 Ah” JZW.915.105.A

“80 Ah” JZW.915.105.F

“85 Ah” JZW.915.105.B

“95 Ah” JZW.915.105.E

⇒ Chapter "3-Color Color Display, Checking, through 03/2008"

⇒ Chapter "2-Color Visual Indicator, Checking, from 04/2008"

“3-Color” Color Display, Checking, through 03/2008

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Visual Indicator General Information:The visual indicator provides information concerning the electrolyte level and the Battery - A - charge level.Before the visual inspection, carefully and gently tap the charge indicator with a screwdriver handle. This causes the air bubbles todisplace to prevent the display from being impaired. Thereby, the color indicator of the visual indicator is more accurate.

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

14 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 15: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Air bubbles can form under the visual indicator, especially if a Battery - A - was recharged or if the Battery - A - was chargedwhile driving. These bubbles may cause the visual indicator to be inaccurate.

Since the visual indicator is only located in a single battery cell, the indication is only valid for that cell. An exact assessment ofthe battery condition can only be determined and confirmed by performing a battery test. Refer to Chapter "Battery LoadTest" .

The visual indicator can be located at various locations on the Battery - A - .

There Are Three Possible Color Displays:»Green«: the Battery - A - is sufficiently charged.

»Black«: the Battery - A - is partially charged, the charge level is less than 65% or discharged.

»No color/bright yellow«: the Battery - A - must be replaced.

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

“2-Color” Visual Indicator, Checking, from 04/2008

NOTE

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

15 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 16: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Visual Indicator General Information:The »green« visual indicator for the charge level indicator is no longer used for these Batteries - A - . Only »black« or »nocolor/bright yellow« are used.The color display shows the Battery - A - electrolyte level.It is no longer possible to read the Battery - A - charge level using the visual indicator. It is necessary to perform a battery test.Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Load Test" .Before the visual inspection, carefully and gently tap the charge indicator with a screwdriver handle. This causes the air bubbles todisplace to prevent the display from being impaired. Thereby, the color indicator of the visual indicator is more accurate.

Air bubbles can form under the visual indicator, especially if a Battery - A - was recharged or if the Battery - A - was chargedwhile driving. These bubbles may cause the visual indicator to be inaccurate.

Since the visual indicator is only located in a single battery cell, the indication is only valid for that cell. An exact assessment ofthe battery condition can only be determined and confirmed by performing a battery test. Refer to Chapter "Battery LoadTest" .

The visual indicator can be located at various locations on the Battery - A - .

Two Visual Indicators Are Possible:»Black«: the electrolyte level is OK

»No color/bright yellow«: electrolyte level too low. The Battery - A - must be replaced.

WARNING

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

16 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 17: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

⇒ Chapter "General Information"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A - Device Description"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Load Test"

⇒ Chapter "Cold Crank Amps Table"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Load Test Results"

⇒ Chapter "Printed Test Results Explanations"

⇒ Chapter "Test Result Evaluation"

General Information

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

It is not necessary to disconnect or remove the Battery - A - when using the - VAS5097A - .The following Batteries - A - can be tested using the - VAS5097A - :

WARNING

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

17 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 18: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

80 to 499 A cold crank amps according to German Industry Standardization DIN (Deutsche Industrie Norm). Refer to ⇒ Note .

95 to 574 A cold crank amps according to IEC (International Engineering Consortium)

136 to 855 A cold crank amps according to EN/SAE (European Norm/ Standard of Automotive Engineers)1)Batteries - A - with cold crank amps greater than 499 A according to the German Industry Standardization can be tested with thesetting for 499 A according to the German Industry Standardization.The Batteries - A - are tested by being loaded with current that corresponds to the starter current of a passenger vehicle. Underthis load, the Battery - A - is evaluated and the measured results are given through the printer.

Pay attention to the - VAS5097A - operating instructions and - VAS5097A - quick reference guide label on the - VAS5097A -and the cold crank amps table. Refer to Chapter "Cold Crank Amps Table" .

- VAS5097A - device description. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A - Device Description" .

Battery load test. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Load Test" .

Cold crank amps table. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Cold Crank Amps Table" .

Battery load test results. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Load Test Results" .

Printed test results explanations. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Printed Test Results Explanations" .

Test result evaluation. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Test Result Evaluation" .

Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A - Device Description

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

18 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 19: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A -

Green LED, “Device in use”1. Red LED, “Device connected with terminals reversed”2. Red LED, “Battery cannot be tested”, the Battery - A - must bereplaced.

3.

Start button4. Cold crank amps selector switch5. ON/OFF Button6. Sliding switch (battery hook-up to the Battery - A - /at jump start point)7. Paper Feed Button8. Printer9.

Battery Load TestSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Pay attention to the TPL 2012182.

Procedure

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

19 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 20: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

The Battery - A - temperature must be at least 10 °C (50 °F).

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.Remove the ignition key.

Check the color display on Batteries - A - with a visual indicator. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery with Color Display (VisualIndicator), Checking" .

Switch on the - VAS5097A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A - Device Description" .

Determine the cold crank amps according to the specifications on the Battery - A - in ampere (A) according to the GermanIndustry Standardization and determine the - VAS5097A - adjustment range using the table. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Cold CrankAmps Table" .

WARNING

NOTE

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

20 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 21: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

If the Battery - A - does not state this value in DIN but rather in IEC or EN/SAE, then convert the value using the table (referto Chapter "Cold Crank Amps Table" ) or the table on the - VAS5097A - .

Set the cold crank amps with the cold crank amps selector switch. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A -Device Description" .

Set the measuring range (80 to 379 A or 380 to 499 A) using the ON/OFF button. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester withPrinter - VAS5097A - Device Description" .

Batteries - A - with cold crank amps greater than 499 A according to the German Industry Standardization can be tested withthe setting for 499 A according to the German Industry Standardization.

Connect the red terminal (+) to the positive terminal of the Battery - A - .

Connect the black terminal (-) to the negative terminal for the Battery - A - .

Make sure the test terminals make sufficient contact.

Note TPL 2012182 for the - VAS5097A - .

NOTE

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

21 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 22: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Using the sliding switch, select the test clamp connection point. Referto ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A - DeviceDescription" .

Direct connection to the Battery - A - 1. Connection to the battery jump start terminal2.

Check if the cold crank amps indicated on the Battery - A - matches theselected value on the Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A - .

Press the Start button. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester with Printer- VAS5097A - Device Description" .

The green LED turns on. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester with Printer- VAS5097A - Device Description" . The test program runs automatically. Thetest results are printed out. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Load Test Results" . Ifthe Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A - does not start, (the LED does notcome on and there is no print out), then charge the Battery - A - . Referto ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging" .

Switch off the - VAS5097A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester withPrinter - VAS5097A - Device Description" .

Remove the test terminals.

The test is over after approximately 20 seconds.

The test results are printed out.

Only perform the test once. Repeating the test will not produce accurateresults.

The - VAS5097A - needs approximately 30 minutes to cool off before it isready for the next measurement.

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

22 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 23: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Cold Crank Amps TableCold Crank Amps in A

EN/SAE IEC German Industry Standardization (DIN)136 – 177 95 – 124 80 – 104178 – 219 125 – 154 105 – 129220 – 261 155 – 184 130 – 154262 – 303 185 – 214 155 – 179304 – 345 215 – 244 180 – 204346 – 387 245 – 274 204 – 229388 – 429 275 – 304 230 – 254430 – 471 305 – 334 255 – 279472 – 513 335 – 364 280 – 304514 – 555 365 – 394 305 –329556 – 597 395 – 424 330 – 354598 – 639 425 – 454 355 – 379640 – 657 455 – 464 380 – 389658 – 675 465 – 474 390 – 399676 – 693 475 – 484 400 – 409694 – 711 485 – 494 410 – 419712 – 729 495 – 504 420 – 429730 – 747 505 – 514 430 – 439748 – 765 515 – 524 440 – 449766 – 783 525 – 534 450 – 459784 – 801 535 – 544 460 – 469802 – 819 545 – 554 470 – 479820 – 837 555 – 564 480 – 489838 – 855 565 – 574 490 – 499. Refer to ⇒ Note .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

23 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 24: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

1)Batteries - A - with cold crank amps greater than 499 A according to the German Industry Standardization can be tested with thesetting for 499 A according to the German Industry Standardization.

Battery Load Test ResultsBy placing the battery under a strong load during the Battery - A - load test, the battery voltage will be reduced.

If the Battery - A - is OK, the voltage drops only to the specified minimum voltage.

If the Battery - A - is defective or has a low charge, the battery voltage will drop very quickly to below the specified minimumvoltage.

After testing, this low voltage level is maintained for a lengthy period and only increases again slowly.

Only perform the test once. Repeating the test will not produce accurate results.

In order to be able to test another/additional Battery - A - , the - VAS5097A - must cool down for approximately 30 minutes forthe test result to be correct.

Printed Test Results Explanations

Measuring range set on the - VAS5097A -1. Diagram, the » -arrow- points to the Battery - A - status.2. Test result3. Battery - A - voltage during the battery load test.4. Vehicle data and date. Filled out by the tester.5.

The printed test results are required for warranty claims.

Only perform the test once. Repeating the test will not produce accurateresults.

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

24 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 25: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Test Result EvaluationPrintout MeasuresStarting powervery good

Battery - A - is OK.

Starting powergood

Battery - A - is OK.

Starting powersufficient

Evaluation through the current draw test. Referto ⇒ Chapter "Current Draw Test" .

Starting powerpoor

Evaluation through the current draw test. Referto ⇒ Chapter "Current Draw Test" .

Starting powervery poor

Evaluation through the current draw test. Referto ⇒ Chapter "Current Draw Test" .

Cannot be tested Charge the Battery - A - and perform the test again.Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging" .

⇒ Chapter "General Information"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester - VAS6161 - Device Description"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Test, Performing using Battery Tester - VAS6161 - "

⇒ Chapter "VW Original Battery Test"

⇒ Chapter "Non VW Battery Test"

⇒ Chapter "Storage Maintenance, Performing"

⇒ Chapter "Explanation of Test Results"

⇒ Chapter "Test Result Evaluation"

General Information

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

25 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 26: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Tester - VAS6161 -

General Description

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

It is not necessary to disconnect or remove the Battery - A - when using the Battery Tester - VAS6161 - .The - VAS6161 - does not put strain on the Battery - A - . It is working according to the principle of dynamic conductivity.The - VAS6161 - stores all battery types.The data can be stored on an SD card.The - VAS6161 - can be updated via an interface or an SD card, so that all battery data from Volkswagen is always current.The integrated infrared sensor (measuring the battery temperature) increases the quality of the measurements.There is a scanner that can also be used to read the bar code on the Battery - A - .

Observe the - VAS6161 - operating instructions.

- VAS6161 - device description. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester - VAS6161 - Device Description" .

Battery test. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Test, Performing using Battery Tester - VAS6161 - " .

VW Original Battery Test, Performing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "VW Original Battery Test" .

Non-VW Battery Test, Performing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Non VW Battery Test" .

Storage Maintenance, Performing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Storage Maintenance, Performing" .

Printed test results explanations. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Explanation of Test Results" .

WARNING

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

26 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 27: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Test result evaluation. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Test Result Evaluation" .

Battery Tester - VAS6161 - Device Description

Battery Tester - VAS6161 -

Internal printer1. Operating lever for the paper tray2. Paper slot3. Main menu display4. Control field with ON/OFF button (power), cursor buttons for selecting5. Connection for the battery tester cable6. SD memory card slot7. Infrared temperature sensor8. PC file transmitter9.

Battery Test, Performing using Battery Tester - VAS6161 -Special tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Tester - VAS6161 -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Procedure

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

27 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 28: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

The Battery - A - temperature must be at least 10 °C (50 °F).

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Check the color display on Batteries - A - with a visual indicator. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery with Color Display (VisualIndicator), Checking" .

Switch on the - VAS6161 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester - VAS6161 - Device Description" .

Connect the red terminal (+) to the positive terminal of the Battery - A - .

Connect the black terminal (-) to the negative terminal for the Battery - A - .

Make sure the test terminals make sufficient contact.

Select one of the following functions.

WARNING

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

28 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 29: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

VW original battery test: all VW original batteries are checked with this outside of the warranty.

Non VW battery test: all batteries from other manufactures are checked with this.

Storage maintenance: for batteries in storage and inventory.

VW Original Battery. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "VW Original Battery Test" .

Non VW battery. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Non VW Battery Test" .

Storage Maintenance. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Storage Maintenance, Performing" .

The test is over after approximately 10 seconds.

The test results are printed out.

The - VAS6161 - does not have to cool down before taking the next measurement.

Switch off the - VAS6161 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester - VAS6161 - Device Description" .

Remove the test terminals.

VW Original Battery Test

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

29 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 30: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

ProcedureSelect “VW Original Battery Test” in the menu.

Select “inside the vehicle” or “outside of the vehicle”.

Select “at the battery terminal” or “at the battery jump start terminal”.

Scan the bar code or manually select the battery type and amps in the menu.

Determine the temperature above the Battery - A - . Hold the infrared sensor approximately 5 cm above the battery terminaluntil the temperature is stable.

Start the test.

Print out the test log.

Non VW Battery Test

The printed test results can differ depending on the software version.

Follow the Battery Tester - VAS6161 - Operating Instructions.

WARNING

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

30 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 31: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

ProcedureSelect “Non VW Battery Test” in the menu.

Select “at the battery terminal” or “at the battery jump start terminal”.

Select the vehicle model.

Select the type of battery: standard, AGM, 2*6 V or Gel.

Select which Standard (CCA, JIS, DIN, SAE, IEC or EN).

Select the battery capacity.

Determine the temperature above the Battery - A - . Hold the infrared sensor approximately 5 cm above the battery terminaluntil the temperature is stable.

Start the test.

Print out the test log.

Storage Maintenance, Performing

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

31 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 32: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

ProcedureSelect “storage maintenance” in the menu.

Connect the scanner.

If there is no scanner, manually enter the VIN on the printed test results.

Scan the VIN.

Select “at the battery terminal” or “at the battery jump start terminal”.

Scan the bar code or manually select “type and manufacturer” in the menu.

Select the vehicle model.

Determine the temperature above the Battery - A - . Hold the infrared sensor approximately 5 cm above the battery terminaluntil the temperature is stable.

Start the test.

Print out the test log.

Explanation of Test Results

WARNING

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

32 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 33: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The layout of the printed test results can vary depending on the softwareversion.

The printed test results are required for warranty claims.

Type of test1. Test result2. Measured voltage3. Battery - A - measured cold start value4. Battery - A - cold start value set on the - VAS6161 -5. Temperature measured above the Battery - A - 6. Battery - A - component location7. Battery terminal clamp position set on the - VAS6161 -8. Selected battery type9.

The printed test results are required for warranty claims.

Test Result Evaluation

Evaluation of the Battery Test Results for the vw Original Battery Test/Non-VW Battery Test

Battery TestResult

Steps

Battery - A - good

No measure on the Battery - A - .

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

33 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 34: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Battery - A - good - recharge

Charge the Battery - A - (refer to ⇒ Chapter"Battery, Charging" ) and determine why the battery isdischarging.

Perform a currentdraw test

Perform a current draw test. Refer to ⇒ Chapter"Current Draw Test" .

Charge the Battery - A - and perform the test again.Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging" .

Battery - A - ,Replacing

Disconnect the Battery - A - and perform the testagain.

The result “replace the battery” can occur due to a weakcable contact.

Battery cell faulty -replace

Replace the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ ElectricalEquipment; Rep. Gr.27 [Battery; Battery, Removingand Installing] .

Connection,Checking

Attach the test terminals directly to the Battery - A - and not to the battery jump start terminal.

Battery - A - worn out

Battery - A - , Replacing

Evaluation of the Battery Test Results for the Storage Maintenance Test

Battery Test Result StepsBattery - A - good No measureBattery - A - ,charge immediately

Charge the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter"Battery, Charging" .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

34 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 35: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Mark as defective Mark the Battery - A - as “defective”.

Tester Connection,Checking

Disconnect the Battery - A - and perform the testagain.

The result “check the tester connection” can occurbecause the cable contact from the test terminals isweak.

Connection,Checking

Attach the test terminals directly to the Battery - A - and not to the battery jump start terminal.

Noises Wait until the measured value appears in the display.Battery - A - wornout

Battery - A - , Replacing

⇒ Chapter "General Information"

⇒ Chapter "Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - Device Description"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Test, Performing using Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - "

⇒ Chapter "Test Result Evaluation"

⇒ Chapter "Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - Troubleshooting"

General Information

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

35 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 36: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Observe the Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - operating instructions.Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - device description. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT -Device Description" .

Battery test. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Test, Performing using Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - " .

Troubleshooting. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - Troubleshooting" .

Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - Device DescriptionOnly Volkswagen approved battery testers may be used to test Batteries - A - in Volkswagen vehicles. Use the - MCR340VKT - inUSA and Canada.Read all safety precautions and operating instructions in the - MCR340VKT - Owner's Manual.More information can be found in Self Study Program No. 234; Vehicle Batteries.The following charging and analysis procedures apply to all Batteries - A - , all battery installed locations (engine compartment orluggage compartment) and all battery purposes (for the starter or for the second/convenience battery).Always consider the following points:

Safety Precautions

- MCR340VKT - set-up guidelines

Display menu

Display buttons and LED

Procedure in the - MCR340VKT - operating instructions.

Battery Test, Performing using Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

36 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 37: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

RequirementsRead the device description. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - Device Description" .

Visually check the battery. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Visual inspection" .

Open the hood or cover for other component locations of the Battery - A - .

Select battery type (standard or AGM).

Remove the covers on the Battery - A - from the positive and negative terminals.

Use fender protector or similar covers before starting procedures in the engine compartment or in the vehicle interior.

Close all the doors.

The Battery - A - temperature must be at least 10 °C (50 °F).

Refer to - MCR340VKT - operating instructions.

Procedure

WARNING

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

37 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 38: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Check the color display on Batteries - A - with a visual indicator. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery with Color Display (VisualIndicator), Checking" .

Switch on the - MCR340VKT - . Refer to - MCR340VKT - operating instructions.

Connect the red terminal (+) to the positive terminal of the Battery - A - .

Connect the black terminal (-) to the negative terminal for the Battery - A - .

Make sure the test terminals make sufficient contact.

Select “warranty test” in the menu.

Select “inside the vehicle” or “outside of the vehicle”.

If the test results are needed to process a warranty claim, use the print function on the - MCR340VKT - .

Select battery type (standard or AGM).

WARNING

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

38 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 39: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Write down the Battery - A - DIN value taken from the battery label. If no German Industry Standardization value is given onthe label, note the SAE value.

Enter the DIN value in the - MCR340VKT - and perform a battery test. Refer to - MCR340VKT - operating instructions.

If using an SAE value, go to “other” in the menu and change “DIN” to “SAE”. Refer to the - MCR340VKT - OperatingInstructions.

Switch off the - MCR340VKT - .

Remove the test terminals.

Always use the German Industry Standardization value on the battery label. Otherwise the test results may be incorrect.

Test Result Evaluation

Battery Test Results

Battery testresult

Steps

Battery - A - good

None

Good - charge Charge the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery,Charging" .

Use Incharge Charge the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery,Charging" .

Battery - A - ,Replacing

Replace the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ ElectricalEquipment; Rep. Gr.27 [Battery; Battery, Removing andInstalling] .

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

39 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 40: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Battery cellfaulty

Replace the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ ElectricalEquipment; Rep. Gr.27 [Battery; Battery, Removing andInstalling] .

Midtronics Battery Tester - MCR340VKT - TroubleshootingSometimes the display shows the malfunction or the messages based on the condition.The following is a list of the most frequent displayed messages together with suggested solutions.Refer to the - MCR340VKT - Operating Instructions for any messages not listed.

DisplayMessage

Steps

No display Make sure the - MCR340VKT - test terminals are attachedsecurely to the battery terminals.

Make sure the terminals are not corroded and are tightenedto the correct tightening specification. Refer to ⇒ ElectricalEquipment; Rep. Gr.27 [Battery; Battery, Removing andInstalling] .

Charge the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery,Charging" .

Systemnoises

Turn off all electrical equipment.

Wait until all electrical equipment monitored by the VehicleElectrical System Control Module - J519 - is switched off.

Remove the ignition key.

Disconnect any questionable, non-series production electrical

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

40 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 41: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

equipment from the vehicle electrical system.

Wait a few minutes and then check again. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Test, Performing using Midtronics Battery Tester- MCR340VKT - " .

If the test was performed at the battery jump start terminal and the message still does not go away, then perform the testdirectly on the Battery - A - .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Vehicle Diagnostic TesterThe Battery - A - can also be checked. Refer to Vehicle Diagnostic Tester when it is installed and without being connected to abattery charger.

Test RequirementsNo battery charger connected.

Battery - A - is connected.

Battery temperature at least +10 °C (50 °F).

ProcedureConnect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester" .

Select the Diagnostic mode and start the diagnosis.

Select the Test plan tab.

Select the Select individual test button and select the following tree structure consecutively:

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

41 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 42: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Body

Electrical system

27 - Starter, Voltage supply

Electrical Components

A - Battery, Checking

The Vehicle Diagnostic Tester continues with the battery test from here on.

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

Make sure the correct charging mode is set on the battery charger so the current draw test is not inaccurate.- VAS5095A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5095A - " .

- VAS5900 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5900 - " .

- VAS5903 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5903 - " .

In order to receive an indication as quickly as possible of the battery condition of discharged Batteries - A - , a conclusion can bemade during the charging process using the Battery - A - current draw as to whether the Battery - A - should be replaced orcharged completely.

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

42 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 43: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

In the case of the - VAS6161 - , the current draw test must always be conducted when the test result “conduct current drawtest” appears in the display.

The Current Draw Test Should Always Be Performed If the Test Using the - VAS5097A - had the Following Results:

Starting power sufficient1. Starting power poor2. Starting power very poor3. cannot be tested - charge the Battery - A - and perform the test again4. - VAS5097A - does not turn on (no LED, no printout)5.

Depending on the test results - VAS5097A - (refer to ⇒ Chapter "Test Result Evaluation" ), additional test steps or work for a clearevaluation of the battery charge must be made.By checking a current draw capacity on a Battery - A - during the charging procedure, it can be determined in a short time whethera partially discharged or severely discharged Battery - A - can become operable again by further charging. Refer to ⇒ Chapter"Severely Discharged Batteries" .

Test RequirementsWhen charging a battery, the battery temperature must be at least 10 °C (50 °F).

The charger must be able to deliver at least 30 A charge current, such as on the - VAS5095A - / - VAS5900 - / - VAS5903 - .

When charging with the - VAS5095A - , the Battery - A - current draw must be measured using a current probe (- VAS6356/4A - ).

The - VAS5900 - and the - VAS5903 - indicate the current draw. The - VAS5900 - automatically performs the menu- guidedcurrent draw test.

ProcedureConnect the Battery - A - to the Battery Charger and start the charging process.

Measure the Battery - A - charge current after five minutes.

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

43 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 44: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Test resultThe charge current must be above 10% of the nominal capacity five minutes after charging begins.

Example:With a 60 Ah battery, the charge current must be greater than 6 A 5 minutes after charging begins.

Charge the Battery - A - completely when the charge current is greater than 10% of the nominal capacity.

Let the Battery - A - sit for two hours and then perform the battery load test. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Load Test" .

If the charge current is less than 10% of the nominal capacity (less than 6 A for a 60 Ah battery) five minutes after starting thecharging, then replace the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment; Rep. Gr.27 [Battery; Battery, Removing and Installing] .

In warranty and Goodwill cases, fill out the battery test sheet and keep it with the Battery - A - .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Analog/Digital Multimeter - FLU83III -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

The resting voltage may only be measured on vehicles in storage or inventory within the scope of the prescribed maintenance andcare work as an assessment criteria for the Battery - A - condition.The resting voltage measurement serves to determine whether it is necessary to recharge the Battery - A - on vehicles in storageor inventory. Refer to Maintenance Tables “Service for Vehicles in Storage or Inventory”.

Test ConditionsThe Battery - A - may not be charged or discharged for at least two days.

ProcedureMeasure the Battery - A - resting voltage using the - FLU83III - .

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

44 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 45: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Test Result

No LoadVoltage

ChargeLevel

Battery - A - Charge

11.60 V 0 % Discharged. Performance capacity diminished completely. Charging totally discharged batteries. Referto ⇒ Chapter "Severely Discharged Batteries" .

Measured Value Required ActionsResting voltage greater thanor equal to 12.5 V

Resting voltage OK

Resting voltage lower than12.5 V

Charge the Battery - A - . Referto ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging" .

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5095A - "

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5900 - "

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5903 - "

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5906 - "

⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester Charger Kit - GRX3000VAS - USA/Canada only"

⇒ Chapter "Solar Battery Maintainer - VAS6102A - "

⇒ Chapter "Severely Discharged Batteries"

⇒ Chapter "General Information"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

45 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 46: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5095A - Device Description"

⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5095A - "

⇒ Chapter "Severely Discharged Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5095A - "

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5095A - Support Mode"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5095A - Maintenance Charging"

General InformationSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5095A -

Test Instrument Set - Current Clamp - 100A - VAS6356/4A -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

In order to prevent damage to the Battery - A - or vehicle, note the information about the battery types. Refer to ⇒ Chapter"Battery Types" .

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

The charge current cannot be read on the - VAS5095A - . The charge current must be measured externally with a current probe (

WARNING

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

46 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 47: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

- VAS6356/4A - ).Observe the - VAS5095A - Operating Instructions.

- VAS5095A - device description. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5095A - Device Description" .

Charge the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5095A - " .

Severely discharged Battery - A - , charging. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Severely Discharged Battery, Charging with Battery Charger- VAS5095A - " .

Support mode. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5095A - Support Mode" .

Buffer mode/maintenance charging. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5095A - Maintenance Charging" .

Battery Charger - VAS5095A - Device DescriptionThe Battery Charger - VAS5095A - is designed to charge all 12 V Batteries - A - in the VW group.The battery is charged without amperage or voltage surges. Thereby the on-board electronics will not be affected. It is notnecessary to remove the Battery - A - from the vehicle or be disconnected from the electrical system during charging.

Battery Charger - VAS5095A -

ON/OFF switch (0 = OFF)1. Charge current display (I greater than 12 A)2. Battery - A - charge current display, partially charged (greater than 90%)

3.

Maintenance charging, lights up green when the Battery - A - is charged4. Interference indicator5. Support mode indicator6. Support Mode/Standard Operation Switch7. Charging cable: red charging clamp (+), black charging clamp (-)8. Battery Type Switch (on the bottom of the unit)9.

Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5095A -Special tools and workshop equipment required

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

47 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 48: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Battery Charger - VAS5095A -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

While charging, always set the battery type to 2.4 V/C (Volts/Battery cell)! This applies to all Batteries - A - .

The Battery - A - temperature must be at least 10 °C (50 °F).

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

ProcedureTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Check the battery type setting on the battery type switch. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5095A - DeviceDescription" . The battery type switch must be set to 2.4V/C (Volts/Battery Cell).

WARNING

CAUTION

NOTE

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

48 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 49: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Connect the red charge terminal (+) to the positive terminal of the Battery - A - .

On vehicles with a Start/Stop function and an installed Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367 - , the black charge terminal(-) must be connected to the body ground. The Start/Stop system will malfunction when it is connected to the Battery - A - negative terminal.

Connect the black charge terminal (-) to the negative terminal of the Battery - A - /negative connector.

Switch on the - VAS5095A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5095A - Device Description" .

Charge current displays ⇒ Fig. "“ Battery Charger - VAS5095A - ”" » -2 and 3- light up yellow. The Battery - A - is partiallycharged (approximately 90 %) when only the yellow LED » -3- is on.If the green LED ⇒ Fig. "“ Battery Charger - VAS5095A - ”" » -4- is also on, then the - VAS5095A - has switched to maintenancecharging. The Battery - A - is charged.

Switch off the - VAS5095A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5095A - Device Description" .

Remove the charging clamps from the battery terminal clamps.

Severely Discharged Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5095A -Special tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5095A -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

The - VAS5095A - automatically detects severely discharged Batteries - A - and starts the charging process conservatively with alow charge current. The charge current is automatically adjusted to the battery charge state.

NOTE

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

49 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 50: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Note the information in the chapter. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Severely Discharged Batteries" .

The battery voltage must be at least 0.6 V!

Severely discharged Batteries - A - in vehicles must be replaced prior to delivery. Pre-existing damage cannot be ruled out.

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

ProcedureCharge the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5095A - " .

Battery Charger - VAS5095A - Support ModeSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5095A -

General InformationThe support mode provides the vehicle electrical system with voltage when the Battery - A - is removed or disconnected.For more information, refer to the - VAS5095A - Operating Instructions.The support mode is used for the following situations:

Vehicle electrical system support mode with the Battery - A - not installed

Maintaining the voltage when the battery is being replaced

Systems test without the Battery - A -

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

50 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 51: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

Procedure

The polarity protection of the charger clamps is not active in the operation mode “charging severely dischargedbatteries/Support mode”. Connect the charger clamps to the battery terminal clamps correctly according to polarity!It can result in sparks due to short circuit.This constitutes an explosion risk.Make sure the charging clamps are secure.

Remove the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment; Rep. Gr.27 [Battery; Battery, Removing and Installing] .

WARNING

WARNING

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

51 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 52: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Whenever the Battery - A - is removed, be careful to prevent contact between the connected charge clamp on the batterypositive terminal clamp and the body ground. Likewise prevent contact between the battery terminal clamps.

Clamp the red charging clamp (+) to the vehicle battery positive terminal clamp.

On vehicles with a Start/Stop function and an installed Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367 - , the black charge terminal(-) must be connected to the body ground. The Start/Stop system will malfunction when it is connected to the Battery - A - negative terminal.

Attach the black charging clamp (-) to the vehicle battery negative terminal clamp.

Check the setting for the support mode/standard operation switch. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5095A - DeviceDescription" . It must be set to “support mode”.

Check the charging clamps reconnected to the correct terminals.

Switch on the - VAS5095A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5095A - Device Description" .

The - VAS5095A - starts the support mode.

End the Battery Support ModeSwitch off the - VAS5095A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5095A - Device Description" .

Remove the charging clamps from the battery terminal clamps.

Disconnect the - VAS5095A - from the power.

Battery Charger - VAS5095A - Maintenance Charging

CAUTION

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

52 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 53: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

In maintenance charging, the - VAS5095A - provides safe charging and preserves the charge of the Battery - A - .

ProcedureProceed as if charging the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5095A - " .

If the Battery - A - is discharged by an electrical consumer during maintenance charging, the - VAS5095A - automatically suppliesthe appropriate charge.Maintenance charging can be performed without time restrictions. The Battery - A - can be used constantly.

⇒ Chapter "General Information"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5900 - Device Description"

⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5900 - "

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5900 - Service Charge"

⇒ Chapter "Severely Discharged Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5900 - "

WARNING

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

53 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 54: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5900 - Support Mode"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5900 - Maintenance Charging"

General InformationSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5900 -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

The effective charge current for the - VAS5900 - can be read directly on the - VAS5900 - .Observe the - VAS5900 - Operating Instructions.

- VAS5900 - device description. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5900 - Device Description" .

Charge the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5900 - " .

Service charge. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5900 - Service Charge" .

Severely discharged Battery - A - , charging. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Severely Discharged Battery, Charging with Battery Charger- VAS5900 - " .

WARNING

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

54 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 55: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Support mode. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5900 - Support Mode" .

Maintenance charging. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5900 - Maintenance Charging" .

Battery Charger - VAS5900 - Device DescriptionThe Battery Charger - VAS5900 - is designed to charge all 12 V Batteries - A - in the VW group.

Battery Charger - VAS5900 -

Control Field Overview

Display1. ↑ - button “Up”2. ↓ - button “Down”3. START/STOP Button4. INFO Button5.

Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5900 -Special tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5900 -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

55 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 56: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

The Battery - A - temperature must be at least 10 °C (50 °F).

ProcedureTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Connect the - VAS5900 - to the power supply. The last selected mode is shown on the display. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "BatteryCharger - VAS5900 - Device Description" .

WARNING

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

56 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 57: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Adjust the battery type with the INFO button.

The symbol » -1- for “standard charge of wet batteries” or the symbol » -2-for “standard charge of Gel/Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM) batteries” is indicatedin the display.

Set the battery capacity (Ah) on the Battery - A - to be charged with thecorresponding ↑ button or ↓ button.

Connect the red charge terminal (+) to the positive terminal of the Battery- A - .

On vehicles with a Start/Stop function and an installed Battery MonitoringControl Module - J367 - , the black charge terminal (-) must be connectedto the body ground. The Start/Stop system will malfunction when it isconnected to the Battery - A - negative terminal.

Connect the black charge terminal (-) to the negative terminal of theBattery - A - /negative connector.

The - VAS5900 - recognizes the nominal voltage of the connected Battery - A - (6 V/12 V/24 V) and begins the charging process automatically.

The - VAS5900 - begins the “final charging” when the charge level isapproximately 80 to 85 %. The fourth bar is indicated on the display » -1- . TheBattery - A - is ready to be used.With a charge status of 100%, all bars are indicated on the display » -1- .With the “standard charge”, parallel operation of electrical consumers duringthe charging process is possible. The charging time is lengthened by this.Depending on the battery type, the - VAS5900 - switches to maintenancecharging after 1 to 7 hours. To reach a 100% charge level, the Battery - A - should remain connected to the - VAS5900 - .

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

57 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 58: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Possible Malfunctions and How They Are Handled

Displayed Voltage Does Not Match the Nominal Voltage:Hold down the ↑ button or ↓ button until the charging process begins.

1.

Displayed Battery Voltage Does Not Match the Nominal Voltage - the Charging Process Has Already Begun:Press the START/STOP button twice.

Hold down the ↑ button or ↓ button until the charging process begins again.

2.

The - VAS5900 - Does Not Recognize the Battery - A - , if the Battery Voltage Is Less Than 2V:The display remains unchanged.The selected battery type and Ampere hours (Ah) are displayed.

3.

Battery - A - Charging, EndingPress the START/STOP button.

Remove the charging clamps from the battery terminal clamps.

Disconnect the - VAS5900 - from the power.

Battery Charger - VAS5900 - Service ChargeSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5900 -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

58 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 59: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

“Service charging” is not permitted for VW vehicles, because voltage surges can damage the on-board electronics.

The Battery - A - must always be disconnected from the vehicle electrical system when using the “service charge” mode.

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

Always set the mode that corresponds to the Battery - A - during the charging process. Refer to the - VAS5900 - OperatingInstructions.

“Service Charging” is suitable for:

Wet batteries having a visual indicator which allows charging (visual indicator black or green).

The “Service charge (SERV)” mode is only used with sulfated Batteries - A - . The Battery - A - with voltages greater than 14.4 Vis charged. A partial removal of the sulfation layer can result from this. Check the visual indicator after charging, immediately beforethe Battery - A - is used. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Color Display (Visual Indicator) in Battery Cover, Checking" .

CAUTION

WARNING

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

59 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 60: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The Battery - A - temperature must be at least 10 °C (50 °F).

ProcedureTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Connect the Battery Charger - VAS5900 - to the power supply. The last selected mode is shown on the display. Referto ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5900 - Device Description" .

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

60 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 61: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Adjust the battery type with the INFO button.

The symbol » -1- for “service charge of wet batteries” or the symbol » -2- for“service charge of Gel/Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM) batteries” is indicated inthe display.

Set the battery capacity (Ah) on the Battery - A - to be charged with thecorresponding ↑ button or ↓ button.

Connect the red charge terminal (+) to the positive terminal of the Battery- A - .

On vehicles with a Start/Stop function and an installed Battery MonitoringControl Module - J367 - , the black charge terminal (-) must be connectedto the body ground. The Start/Stop system will malfunction when it isconnected to the Battery - A - negative terminal.

Connect the black charge terminal (-) to the negative terminal of theBattery - A - / negative connector.

The - VAS5900 - recognizes the nominal voltage of the connected Battery - A - (6 V/12 V/24 V) and begins the charging process automatically.

The - VAS5900 - begins the “final charging” when the charge level isapproximately 80 to 85 % of the battery voltage. The fourth bar is indicated onthe display » -1- . The Battery - A - is now ready to be used.

A successful “service charge” depends on the degree of sulfation on theBattery - A - .

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

61 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 62: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Possible Malfunctions and How They Are Handled

Displayed Voltage Does Not Match the Nominal Voltage:Hold down the ↑ button or ↓ button until the charging process begins.

1.

Displayed Battery Voltage Does Not Match the Nominal Voltage - the Charging Process Has Already Begun:Press the START/STOP button twice.

Hold down the ↑ button or ↓ button until the charging process begins.

2.

The Charger Does Not Recognize a Battery - A - , When the Battery Voltage Is Less Than 2 V:The display remains unchanged.The set operating mode and Ampere-hours (Ah) are displayed.

3.

Battery - A - Charging, EndingPress the START/STOP button.

Remove the charging clamps from the battery terminal clamps.

Disconnect the Battery Charger - VAS5900 - from the power.

Severely Discharged Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5900 -Special tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5900 -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

62 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 63: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

The polarity protection of the charger clamps is not active in the operation mode “charging severely dischargedbatteries/Support mode”. Connect the charger clamps to the battery terminal clamps correctly according to polarity!Always set the mode that corresponds to the Battery - A - during the charging process. Refer to the - VAS5900 - OperatingInstructions.The - VAS5900 - does not recognize the severely discharged Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Severely DischargedBatteries" .Do not press the START/STOP button when battery cables are connected incorrectly. The - VAS5900 - can become damaged.

The - VAS5900 - will not automatically recognize the Battery - A - for Batteries - A - with a voltage less than 2 V.

Pay attention to the information in the chapter. Refer to Chapter "Severely Discharged Batteries" .

The Battery - A - temperature must be at least 10 °C (50 °F).

Severely discharged batteries in vehicles must be replaced prior to delivery. Pre-existing damage cannot be ruled out.

Procedure

WARNING

CAUTION

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

63 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 64: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Connect the - VAS5900 - to the power supply. The last selected mode is shown on the display. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "BatteryCharger - VAS5900 - Device Description" .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

64 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 65: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Adjust the battery type with the INFO button.

The symbol » -1- for “service charge of wet batteries” or the symbol » -2- for“service charge of Gel/Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM) batteries” is indicated inthe display.

Set the battery capacity (Ah) on the Battery - A - to be charged with thecorresponding ↑ button or ↓ button.

Connect the red charge terminal (+) to the positive terminal of the Battery- A - .

On vehicles with a Start/Stop function and an installed Battery MonitoringControl Module - J367 - , the black charge terminal (-) must be connectedto the body ground. The Start/Stop system will malfunction when it isconnected to the Battery - A - negative terminal.

Connect the black charge terminal (-) to the negative terminal of theBattery - A - / negative connector.

Press the START/STOP button for approximately five seconds. The menuselection “Charging severely discharged batteries/Support mode” isactivated.

Press the corresponding ↑ - button or ↓ button to adjust the battery voltage(6 V/12 V/24 V).

If no button is touched within five seconds, the - VAS5900 - will return tothe main menu (operating mode selection).

Confirm the selected battery voltage using the START/STOP button

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

65 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 66: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Battery - A - Charging, EndingPress the START/STOP button.

Remove the charging clamps from the battery terminal clamps.

Disconnect the - VAS5900 - from the power.

Battery Charger - VAS5900 - Support ModeSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5900 -

General InformationThe support mode provides the vehicle electrical system with voltage when the Battery - A - is removed or disconnected.For more information, refer to the - VAS5900 - Operating Instructions.The support mode is used for the following situations:

Vehicle electrical system support mode with the Battery - A - not installed

Maintaining the voltage when the battery is being replaced

Systems test without the Battery - A -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

66 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 67: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

Procedure

The polarity protection of the charger clamps is not active in the operation mode “charging severely dischargedbatteries/Support mode”. Connect the charger clamps to the battery terminal clamps correctly according to polarity!It can result in sparks due to short circuit.This constitutes an explosion risk.Do not press the START/STOP button when battery cables are connected incorrectly. The - VAS5900 - can become damaged.

Remove the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment; Rep. Gr.27 [Battery; Battery, Removing and Installing] .

Connect the - VAS5900 - to the power supply. The last selected mode is shown on the display. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "BatteryCharger - VAS5900 - Device Description" .

Whenever the Battery - A - is removed, be careful to prevent contact between the connected charge clamp on the batterypositive terminal clamp and the body ground. Likewise prevent contact between the battery terminal clamps.

Connect the red charge terminal (+) to the positive terminal of the Battery - A - .

WARNING

CAUTION

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

67 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 68: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

On vehicles with a Start/Stop function and an installed Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367 - , the black charge terminal(-) must be connected to the body ground. The Start/Stop system will malfunction when it is connected to the Battery - A - negative terminal.

Connect the black charge terminal (-) to the negative terminal of the Battery - A - / negative connector.

Press the START/STOP button for approximately five seconds. The menu selection “Charging severely dischargedbatteries/Support mode” is activated.

Press the corresponding ↑ - button or ↓ button to adjust the battery voltage (6 V/12 V/24 V).

If no button is touched within five seconds, the - VAS5900 - will return to the main menu (operating mode selection).

Confirm the selected battery voltage using the START/STOP button.

Then the inquiry about the correct polarity of the charging clamps is made.Check the charging clamps reconnected to the correct terminals.

Confirm charging clamps are connected to correct terminals via START/STOP button.

The - VAS5900 - starts the Battery - A - support mode.

End the Battery Support ModePress the START/STOP button.

Remove the charging clamps from the battery terminal clamps.

Disconnect the - VAS5900 - from the power.

Battery Charger - VAS5900 - Maintenance Charging

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

68 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 69: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5900 -If the Battery - A - is discharged by an electrical consumer during maintenance charging, the - VAS5900 - automatically suppliesthe appropriate charge.Maintenance charging can be performed without time restrictions. The Battery - A - can be used constantly.

Pay attention to the maintenance notes from the battery manufacturer.

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

If the Battery - A - is fully charged, the - VAS5900 - starts maintenance charging.

ProcedureProceed as if charging the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5900 - " .

With a charge status of 100%, all bars are indicated on the display » -1- .

NOTE

WARNING

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

69 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 70: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "General Information"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5903 - Device Description"

⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5903 - "

⇒ Chapter "Refresh Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5903 - "

⇒ Chapter "Severely Discharged Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5903 - "

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5903 - Support Mode"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5903 - Maintenance Charging"

General InformationSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5903 -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

Observe the - VAS5903 - Operating Instructions.

WARNING

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

70 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 71: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

- VAS5903 - device description. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5903 - Device Description" .

Charge the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5903 - " .

Refresh charge. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Refresh Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5903 - " .

Severely discharged Battery - A - , charging. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Severely Discharged Battery, Charging with Battery Charger- VAS5903 - " .

Support mode. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5903 - Support Mode" .

Maintenance charging. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5903 - Maintenance Charging" .

Battery Charger - VAS5903 - Device DescriptionSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5903 -The - VAS5903 - is designed to charge all 12 V Batteries - A - in the VW group.

- VAS5903 -

Control Field Overview

Display1. ↑ - button “Up”2. ↓ - button “Down”3. START/STOP Button4. INFO Button5.

Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5903 -Special tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5903 -

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

71 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 72: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

The Battery - A - temperature must be at least 10 °C (50 °F).

ProcedureTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Connect the Battery Charger - VAS5903 - to the power supply. The last selected operation mode is shown on the display. Referto ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5903 - Device Description" .

WARNING

WARNING

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

72 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 73: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Adjust the battery type with the INFO button.

The symbol » -1- for “standard charge of wet batteries” or the symbol » -2-for “standard charge of Gel/Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM) batteries” is indicatedin the display.

Set the battery capacity (Ah) on the Battery - A - to be charged with thecorresponding ↑ button or ↓ button.

Connect the red charge terminal (+) to the positive terminal of the Battery- A - .

On vehicles with a Start/Stop function and an installed Battery MonitoringControl Module - J367 - , the black charge terminal (-) must be connectedto the body ground. The Start/Stop system will malfunction when it isconnected to the Battery - A - negative terminal.

Connect the black charge terminal (-) to the negative terminal of theBattery - A - / negative connector.

The - VAS5903 - recognizes the nominal voltage of the connected Battery - A - (6 V/12 V/24 V) and begins the charging process automatically.

The - VAS5903 - begins the “final charging” when the charge level isapproximately 80 to 85 %. The fourth bar is indicated on the display » -1- . TheBattery - A - is ready to be used.With a charge status of 100%, all bars are indicated on the display » -1- .With the battery type “standard charge”, parallel operation of electricalconsumers during the charging process is possible. The charging time islengthened by this.Depending on the battery type, the - VAS5903 - switches to maintenancecharging after 1 to 7 hours. To reach a 100% charge level, the Battery - A - should remain connected to the - VAS5903 - .

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

73 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 74: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Possible Malfunctions and How They Are Handled

Displayed Voltage Does Not Match the Nominal Voltage:Hold down the ↑ button or ↓ button until the charging process begins.

1.

Displayed Battery Voltage Does Not Match Rated Voltage - Charging Process Has Already Begun:Press the START/STOP button twice.

Hold down the ↑ button or ↓ button until the charging process begins again.

2.

The Charger Does Not Recognize a Battery - A - , When the Battery Voltage Is Less Than 2 V:The display remains unchanged.The selected battery type and Ampere hours (Ah) are displayed.

3.

Battery - A - Charging, EndingPress the START/STOP button.

Remove the charging clamps from the battery terminal clamps.

Disconnect the - VAS5903 - from the power.

Refresh Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5903 -Special tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5900 -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

74 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 75: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

Refresh charging mode is not permitted for VW vehicles, because voltage surges can damage the on-board electronics.

The Battery - A - must always be disconnected from the vehicle electrical system when using the refresh charge mode.

Always set the mode that corresponds to the Battery - A - during the charging process. Refer to the - VAS5903 - OperatingInstructions.

Refresh charging is suitable for wet batteries, which must be filled with distilled water.

Do not use refresh charging mode on maintenance-free wet batteries.

“Refresh charging (Refr)” mode is only used for Batteries - A - that are possibly faulty (sulfation). The Battery - A - is thencharged to the maximum specific gravity of the electrolyte and the plates are reactivated (removal of sulfation layer).

WARNING

CAUTION

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

75 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 76: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The Battery - A - temperature must be at least 10 °C (50 °F).

ProcedureTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Connect the - VAS5903 - to the power supply. The last selected operation mode is shown on the display. Refer to ⇒ Chapter"Battery Charger - VAS5903 - Device Description" .

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

76 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 77: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Adjust the battery type with the INFO button.

The symbol » -1- for “refresh charge of wet batteries” or the symbol » -2- for“refresh charge of Gel/Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM) batteries” is indicated inthe display.

Set the battery capacity (Ah) on the Battery - A - to be charged with thecorresponding ↑ button or ↓ button.

Connect the red charge terminal (+) to the positive terminal of the Battery- A - .

On vehicles with a Start/Stop function and an installed Battery MonitoringControl Module - J367 - , the black charge terminal (-) must be connectedto the body ground. The Start/Stop system will malfunction when it isconnected to the Battery - A - negative terminal.

Connect the black charge terminal (-) to the negative terminal of theBattery - A - / negative connector.

The - VAS5900 - recognizes the nominal voltage of the connected Battery - A - (6 V/12 V/24 V) and begins the charging process automatically.

The - VAS5900 - begins the “final charging” when the charge level isapproximately 80 to 85 % of the battery voltage. The fourth bar is indicated onthe display » -1- . The Battery - A - is now ready to be used.

A successful refresh charge depends on the degree of sulfation on theBattery - A - .

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

77 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 78: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Possible Malfunctions and How They Are Handled

Displayed Voltage Does Not Match the Nominal Voltage:Hold down the ↑ button or ↓ button until the charging process begins.

1.

Displayed Battery Voltage Does Not Match Rated Voltage - Charging Process Has Already Begun:Press the START/STOP button twice.

Hold down the ↑ button or ↓ button until the charging process begins.

2.

The Charger Does Not Recognize a Battery - A - , When the Battery Voltage Is Less Than 2 V:The display remains unchanged.The set operating mode and Ampere-hours (Ah) are displayed.

3.

Battery - A - Charging, EndingPress the START/STOP button.

Remove the charging clamps from the battery terminal clamps.

Disconnect the - VAS5903 - from the power.

Severely Discharged Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5903 -Special tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5903 -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

78 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 79: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

The polarity protection of the charger clamps is not active in the operation mode “charging severely dischargedbatteries/Support mode”. Connect the charger clamps to the battery terminal clamps correctly according to polarity!Always set the mode that corresponds to the Battery - A - during the charging process. Refer to the - VAS5903 - OperatingInstructions.The - VAS5903 - does not recognize the severely discharged Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Severely DischargedBatteries" .Do not press the START/STOP button when battery cables are connected incorrectly. The - VAS5903 - can become damaged.

The - VAS5903 - will not automatically recognize the Battery - A - for Batteries - A - with a voltage less than 2 V.

Pay attention to the information in the chapter. Refer to Chapter "Severely Discharged Batteries" .

The Battery - A - temperature must be at least 10 °C (50 °F).

Severely discharged batteries in vehicles must be replaced prior to delivery. Pre-existing damage cannot be ruled out.

Procedure

WARNING

CAUTION

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

79 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 80: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Connect the - VAS5903 - to the power supply. The last selected operation mode is shown on the display. Refer to ⇒ Chapter"Battery Charger - VAS5903 - Device Description" .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

80 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 81: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Adjust the battery type with the INFO button.

The symbol » -1- for “service charge of wet batteries” or the symbol » -2- for“service charge of Gel/Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM) batteries” is indicated inthe display.

Set the battery capacity (Ah) on the Battery - A - to be charged with thecorresponding ↑ button or ↓ button.

Connect the red charge terminal (+) to the positive terminal of the Battery- A - .

On vehicles with a Start/Stop function and an installed Battery MonitoringControl Module - J367 - , the black charge terminal (-) must be connectedto the body ground. The Start/Stop system will malfunction when it isconnected to the Battery - A - negative terminal.

Connect the black charge terminal (-) to the negative terminal of theBattery - A - /negative connector.

Press the START/STOP button for approximately five seconds. The menuselection “Charging severely discharged batteries/Support mode” isactivated.

Press the corresponding ↑ - button or ↓ button to adjust the battery voltage(6 V/12 V/24 V).

If no button is touched within five seconds, the - VAS5903 - will return tothe main menu (operating mode selection).

Confirm the selected battery voltage using the START/STOP button

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

81 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 82: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Battery - A - Charging, EndingPress the START/STOP button.

Remove the charging clamps from the battery terminal clamps.

Disconnect the - VAS5903 - from the power.

Battery Charger - VAS5903 - Support ModeSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5903 -

General InformationThe support mode provides the vehicle electrical system with voltage when the Battery - A - is removed or disconnected.For more information, refer to the - VAS5903 - Operating Instructions.The support mode is used for the following situations:

Vehicle electrical system support mode with the Battery - A - not installed

Maintaining the voltage when the battery is being replaced

Systems test without the Battery - A -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

82 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 83: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

Procedure

The polarity protection of the charger clamps is not active in the operation mode “charging severely dischargedbatteries/Support mode”. Connect the charger clamps to the battery terminal clamps correctly according to polarity!It can result in sparks due to short circuit.This constitutes an explosion risk.Make sure the charging clamps are secure.Do not press the START/STOP button when battery cables are connected incorrectly. The - VAS5903 - can become damaged.

Remove the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment; Rep. Gr.27 [Battery; Battery, Removing and Installing] .

Connect the - VAS5903 - to the power supply. The last selected operation mode is shown on the display. Refer to ⇒ Chapter"Battery Charger - VAS5903 - Device Description" .

Whenever the Battery - A - is removed, be careful to prevent contact between the connected charge clamp on the batterypositive terminal clamp and the body ground. Likewise prevent contact between the battery terminal clamps.

WARNING

CAUTION

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

83 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 84: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Connect the red charge terminal (+) to the positive terminal of the Battery - A - .

On vehicles with a Start/Stop function and an installed Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367 - , the black charge terminal(-) must be connected to the body ground. The Start/Stop system will malfunction when it is connected to the Battery - A - negative terminal.

Connect the black charge terminal (-) to the negative terminal of the Battery - A - / negative connector.

Press the START/STOP button for approximately five seconds. The menu selection “Charging severely dischargedbatteries/Support mode” is activated.

Press the corresponding ↑ - button or ↓ button to adjust the battery voltage (6 V/12 V/24 V).

If no button is touched within five seconds, the - VAS5903 - will return to the main menu (operating mode selection).

Confirm the selected battery voltage using the START/STOP button.

Then the inquiry about the correct polarity of the charging clamps is made.Check the charging clamps reconnected to the correct terminals.

Confirm charging clamps are connected to correct terminals via START/STOP button.

The - VAS5903 - starts the Battery - A - support mode.

End the Battery Support ModePress the START/STOP button.

Remove the charging clamps from the battery terminal clamps.

Disconnect the - VAS5903 - from the power.

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

84 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 85: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Battery Charger - VAS5903 - Maintenance ChargingSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5903 -If the Battery - A - is discharged by an electrical consumer during maintenance charging, the - VAS5903 - automatically suppliesan appropriate charge.Maintenance charging can be performed without time restrictions. The Battery - A - can be used constantly.

Pay attention to the maintenance notes from the battery manufacturer.

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

If the Battery - A - is fully charged, the Battery Charger - VAS5903 - starts maintenance charging.

ProcedureProceed as if charging the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5903 - " .

With a charge status of 100%, all bars are indicated on the display » -1- .

NOTE

WARNING

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

85 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 86: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "General Information"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5906 - Device Description"

⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5906 - "

General Information

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

Observe the Battery Charger - VAS5906 - Operating Instructions.Battery Charger - VAS5906 - device description. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Charger - VAS5906 - Device Description" .

Charge the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5906 - " .

Battery Charger - VAS5906 - Device Description

WARNING

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

86 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 87: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Battery Charger - VAS5906 -The - VAS5906 - was developed especially for charging the vehicle electricalsystem while the vehicle is on display.It supplies for automatic charging of 3 - 300 Ah for starter batteries.The 14.4 V maximum charging voltage is not exceeded. All electricalconsumers will be supported up to 30 A by the support charging.After the Battery - A - is completely charged, the - VAS5906 - switches intothe maintenance charging for long-term operation.The - VAS5906 - starts automatically and does not need any adjustments.Only the charging terminals and the network cable need to be connected.For more information, refer to the - VAS5906 - Operating Instructions.

Control Field Overview

25% charge display1. 50% charge display2. 75% charge display3. 100% charge display4. Ready-to-use display5. START/STOP button and Setup button to interrupt and restart thecharging process. Enter into the setup menu and select characteristicline type (hold for 10 seconds)

6.

Display malfunction7.

Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5906 -Special tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Charger - VAS5906 -

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

87 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 88: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

ProcedureTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Place the - VAS5906 - in the engine compartment or under the vehicle.

Connect the - VAS5906 - to the power supply.

The - VAS5906 - is in idle, the display comes on when it is “ready to be used”.

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Connect the red charge terminal (+) to the positive terminal of the Battery - A - .

WARNING

WARNING

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

88 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 89: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

On vehicles with a Start/Stop function and an installed Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367 - , the black charge terminal(-) must be connected to the body ground. The Start/Stop system will malfunction when it is connected to the Battery - A - negative terminal.

Connect the black charge terminal (-) to the negative terminal of the Battery - A - /negative connector.

The charging process starts after approximately two seconds.LEDs show the Battery - A - charge level. When all the lamps illuminate, the Battery - A - is charged.When the Battery - A - is completely charged, the - VAS5906 - automatically switches to maintenance charging.

Sparks can result if the charging terminals are removed too early. Confirm the charging process by pressing the START/STOPbutton.

Battery - A - Charging, EndingPress the START/STOP button.

Remove the charging clamps from the battery terminal clamps.

Disconnect the - VAS5906 - from the power.

⇒ Chapter "General Information"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester Charger Kit - GRX3000VAS - Device Description"

⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with - GRX3000VAS - "

NOTE

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

89 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 90: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester Charger Kit - GRX3000VAS - Troubleshooting"

General InformationSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Battery Tester Charger Kit - GRX3000VAS -

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

Observe the - GRX3000VAS - Operating Instructions.- GRX3000VAS - device description. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester Charger Kit - GRX3000VAS - Device Description" .

Charge the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with - GRX3000VAS - " .

- GRX3000VAS - troubleshooting. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester Charger Kit - GRX3000VAS - Troubleshooting" .

Battery Tester Charger Kit - GRX3000VAS - Device DescriptionOnly Volkswagen approved battery chargers may be used to charge Batteries - A - in Volkswagen vehicles. Only the- GRX3000VAS - battery charger is used in the USA and Canada.The - GRX3000VAS - battery charger combines battery charging with checking the charge level and testing the battery.The charging and analysis procedures apply to all Batteries - A - , all battery installed locations (engine compartment or luggage

WARNING

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

90 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 91: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

compartment) and all battery designated usage (for the starter or for the second/convenience battery).Always consider the following points:

Safety Precautions

- MCR340VKT - set-up guidelines

Display menu

Display buttons and LED

Procedure in the - MCR340VKT - operating instructions.

More information can be found in Self Study Program No. 234; Vehicle Batteries.

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

Keep open flame and sparks away from the Batteries - A - and do not smoke.

The - GRX3000VAS - must be switched off when connecting or disconnect the cables.

Do not remove the plugs while charging.

Overcharging sulfated Batteries - A - can cause an explosion.

Precision tools may not be kept in areas where batteries are charged. Chemical reactions can lead to corrosion.

WARNING

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

91 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 92: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

Battery, Charging with - GRX3000VAS -

Requirements

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

Output - setup (unit number/date/time), performing. Refer to the - GRX3000VAS - Operating Instructions.

General information, checking. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery Tester Charger Kit - GRX3000VAS - Device Description" .

Battery - A - , visually inspecting. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Visual inspection" .

Select the battery type (standard or AGM).

Close all vehicle doors.

WARNING

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

92 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 93: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The Battery - A - temperature must be at least 10 °C (50 °F).

For more information, refer to the - GRX3000VAS - Operating Instructions.

ProcedureTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Connect the red charge terminal (+) to the positive terminal of the Battery - A - .

On vehicles with a Start/Stop function and an installed Battery Monitoring Control Module - J367 - , the black charge terminal(-) must be connected to the body ground. The Start/Stop system will malfunction when it is connected to the Battery - A - negative terminal.

Connect the black charge terminal (-) to the negative terminal of the Battery - A - / negative connector.

Connect the - GRX3000VAS - to the power supply.

Switch the ON/OFF switch on the - GRX3000VAS - to “ON”.

Select the charging mode (automatic or manual).

Select the test (inside the vehicle or outside the vehicle).

Select the battery type (standard or AGM).

Select the type of test (warranty or other). Note any additional details (depending on the type of test).

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

93 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 94: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

For more information, refer to the - GRX3000VAS - Operating Instructions.

Adhere to the required menu items for the “warranty” test type..

The - GRX3000VAS - checks the Battery - A - and starts the charging process. The display then shows one of three results withthe approximate charging time.

Result StepsBattery - A - good

The Battery - A - can be used again.

Charging isrequired

The test shows a low state of charge.

The charging process begins and the exact duration for thecharging will be displayed

The cold start performance and the remaining chargingtime are displayed and updated regularly.

Battery - A -, Replacing

Battery - A - defective. The charging process is interrupted.Replace the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ ElectricalEquipment; Rep. Gr.27 [Battery; Battery, Removing andInstalling] .

If other malfunction messages or text displays, other than the ones already mentioned, appear in the display on the- GRX3000VAS - battery charger. Refer to Chapter "Battery Tester Charger Kit - GRX3000VAS - Troubleshooting" .

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

94 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 95: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

If the Battery - A - starts to vent gas heavily, stop the charging process. Press the Stop button on the front side.

After the charging and testing process is completed, the - GRX3000VAS - will display “battery good” or “replace the battery” and thetotal charging time.Depending on the individual scenario (warranty claim, repair order, evaluation and storage), there are three possible messages:

Produce a test code (possible only after automatic charging and testing).

Print last test result (for Warranty)

Display the last test result.

Note the additional information. Refer to the - GRX3000VAS - Operating Instructions.

Battery - A - Charging, EndingRemove the charging clamps from the battery terminal clamps.

Disconnect the - GRX3000VAS - .

Battery Tester Charger Kit - GRX3000VAS - TroubleshootingSometimes the display shows the malfunction or the messages based on the condition.The following is a list of the most frequent displayed messages together with suggested solutions.

For any messages not listed, refer to the - GRX3000VAS - Operating Instructions.

WARNING

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

95 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 96: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

DisplayMessage

Steps

Connection,Checking

Make sure the - GRX3000VAS - charging clamps areattached securely to the battery terminals.

Make sure the battery terminal is tightened to thetightening specification and is not corroded.

Terminalsconnected?

- GRX3000VAS - safety function.Connect the charging clamps to the Battery - A - beforestarting the charging process.

System noises Turn off all electrical equipment.

Wait until all electrical equipment, which are monitoredby the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 -, are switched off.

Remove the ignition key.

Disconnect any questionable, non-series productionelectrical equipment from the vehicle electrical system.

Wait a few minutes and repeat the charging process. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with - GRX3000VAS - "

⇒ Chapter "Solar Battery Maintainer - VAS6102A - Device Description"

⇒ Chapter "Solar Battery Maintainer - VAS6102A - Maintenance Charging"

Solar Battery Maintainer - VAS6102A - Device Description

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

96 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 97: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Solar Battery Maintainer - VAS6102A -The - VAS6102A - supports the vehicle electrical system and prevents theBattery - A - from self-discharging.The - VAS6102A - reaches a maximum voltage of 14.3 V and a maximumcharge current of 255 mA.All chargeable lead- and lead gel batteries can be charged with the- VAS6102A - .The - VAS6102A - is connected to the data link connector in the vehicle.The - VAS6102A - has a green LED integrated inside the frame which displaysthe function being performed. The brighter the LED, the higher the chargingcurrent.It is not possible to overcharge the Battery - A - due to the integratedelectronics.The - VAS6102A - is secured on the interior rearview mirror » -1- . The bottomrests on the instrument panel » -2- .

The Solar Battery Maintainer - VAS6102A - must not touch the instrumentpanel completely. Only the bottom edge may be used for support. If ittouches completely, the color of the instrument panel could change.

Solar Battery Maintainer - VAS6102A - Maintenance ChargingSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Solar Battery Maintainer - VAS6102A -

Procedure

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

97 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 98: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Secure the - VAS6102A - to the interior rearview mirror » -1- .

Lay the bottom on the instrument panel » -2- .

The - VAS6102A - must not touch the instrument panel completely. Onlythe bottom edge may be used for support. If it touches completely, thecolor of the instrument panel could change.

Pull the securing string together so that the - VAS6102A - is close to theglass.

Connect the connector for the - VAS6102A - to the vehicle data linkconnector. Connecting is the same as with Vehicle Diagnostic Tester. Referto ⇒ Chapter "Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester" .

Check the - VAS6102A - functionality. The green LED must come on.

Risk of injury! Pay attention to all warnings and safety precautions. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Warnings and Safety Precautions" .

A Battery - A - is designated as “severely discharged” if the resting voltage is less than 11.6 V.

NOTE

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

98 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 99: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not check or charge a Battery - A - when the visual indicator has »no color or is bright yellow«. Do not give a jump start.

There is a risk of explosion during testing, charging or jump starting.

These Batteries - A - must be replaced.

Severely discharged Batteries - A - freeze earlier.Batteries - A - that have frozen must no longer be used.

Batteries - A - that have not been used for a long time will discharge by themselves.

In severely discharged Batteries - A - , the electrolyte consists almost completely of water, because the acid portion has beengreatly reduced.

Severely discharged Batteries - A - become sulfated, meaning all of the plate surfaces of the Batteries - A - harden.

The sulfation process may be reversed if a severely discharged Battery - A - is recharged immediately.

If the Battery - A - is not recharged, the plates will continue to harden, and the ability to accept a charge will decrease. Thisresults in reduction of battery performance.

Severely discharged Batteries - A - in vehicles must be replaced prior to delivery. Pre-existing damage cannot be ruled out.

Procedure

WARNING

CAUTION

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

99 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 100: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Check the Battery - A - resting voltage. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging" .

Charge the Battery - A - :

Battery Charger - VAS5095A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Severely Discharged Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5095A -" .

Battery Charger - VAS5900 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Severely Discharged Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5900 - " .

Battery Charger - VAS5903 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Severely Discharged Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5903 - " .

Battery Charger - VAS5906 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with Battery Charger - VAS5906 - " .

Battery Tester Charger Kit - GRX3000VAS - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Charging with - GRX3000VAS - " .

⇒ Chapter "Cruise Control System Function"

⇒ Chapter "Cruise Control System, Activating and Deactivating"

General DescriptionCruise control system functions are controlled by the Engine Control Module - J623 - .Cruise Control System, activating and deactivating. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Cruise Control System, Activating and Deactivating" .

Malfunction Recognition and Malfunction IndicatorMalfunctions in relation to the cruise control system are sent via the Engine Control Module - J623 - .For troubleshooting, use the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester in the “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

ProcedureConnect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Vehicle Diagnostic Tester" .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

100 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 101: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Select Guided Fault Finding.

Use the GO TO button to select the “function/component selection” and the following menu options one after the other:

Drivetrain

Engine code

01 - OBD-capable systems

Engine control module or diesel direct injection and pre-glow system

Functions

Cruise Control System, Activating and Deactivating

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Analog/Digital Multimeter - FLU83III -

Battery Charger - VAS5095A -

Battery Tester with Printer - VAS5097A -

Battery Charger - VAS5900 -

Battery Charger - VAS5903 -

Battery Charger - VAS5906 -

Solar Battery Maintainer - VAS6102A -

Battery Tester - VAS6161 -

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

101 of 101 1/30/2019 10:39 AM

Page 102: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

�������� �����

� ����������������������������� �������� �� � ��� ��!���"����� ��#

$� ��%��" &$�'�&()� ��&&&*�� �'&+,��'����&�&-� �'��'&.��� �'���+&&&&*�� �'&+$�'�&/�'�&�&&/��&0&&1&23456789&:8;&<8=>:??789@&&&&*�� �'&+$� ��%��" &$�'�&()� ��A&B�� �� ���&��&$� �� ���+&&&&*�� �'&+-� �'��'&.��� �'���&(����'&�&&�C!&0&&1&23456789&:8;&<8=>:??789@&,��'����&�&-� �'��'&.��� �'���DEFGEHIHJK&EL&MHJNOPQILJ&MRSTF&UVKJIFWNHJITNETFEHNJETNHX&STI&YIGIHYIHJ&EH&ZIQN[RI&I\]NGFIHJ��&$�'�&/�'�&�&/��&�&&_� & ��� �����&�����"�� ����&��&_�-�& ��&��� �'&�"& ��&������&�����'�������&��&-�� ������&�"�'& �&a&*�� �'+$�'�&/�'�&�&/��&�&&A&�������&��&-�� �����+&���&b'�� &c������'&B��'&*�� '��&.�����&�&d!eC&�&&-�& ��&"'�� &�������'&���'�"�'& �&a&f��)&�� �'��'g&���&'�hCij*�� '�k��l���g&*������� &k�� ���&,��'����&�&*�� '�k��l���m&�!�&b'�� &c������'&B��'&*�� � &(�� ��&�&b!&�&&-�����& ��&b'�� &c������'&*�� '�&k��l���&k��ln�� &�&b���&�&&�"�'& �&a&f��)&�� �'��'g&���&'�hCijB��'*������� �g&,��'����&�&B��'&*������� �m&�#�&-� �'��'&.��� �'���&(����'&�&�C!&�&&-�& ��&b'�� &-� �'��'&k��&�&o�&�&&�������&��&-�� ������&�"�'& �&a&*�� �'+-� �'��'&.��� �'���&(����'&�&�C!&�&&A&���������&-�� �����+&�h�&B'���'&B��'&*�� � &(�� ��&�&b�&�&&-�����& ��&B'���'&*�� '�&k��l���&k��l&n�� &�&b���&�&�"�'& �&a&f��)&�� �'��'g&���&'�hCijB��'* , � B * m

pqPr

Page 103: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

�������� �����

� ����������������������������� �������� �� � ��� ��!���"����� ��#

$������� �%&'��(����&�&)��(&$������� �*&�+�&,�(&-��&-��.&/�� &�&0�1+&�&&,�"�(& �&2&3��4&�� �(��(%&,���&(�1156,�(&-��%'��(����&�&7���*&�8�&9� �(��(&:��� �(���&)�� �� ���&;�� ��&�&��+8&�&&,�������&��&9�� ������&,�"�(& �&2&$�� �(<9� �(��(&:��� �(���&)�� �� ���&;�� ��&�&��+8&�&&=,�������&��&9�� �����<&�>�&)(���(&)��(&$�� (��&:�����&�&?!>+&�&&9�& ��&�(���(&���(,�"�(& �&2&3��4&�� �(��(%&,���&(�1856$�� (�-��.���%&$������� &-�� ���&'��(����&�&$�� (�-��.���*&���&@������&���� (���&;4� ��&$�� (��&:�����&�&?1��&�&&9�����& ��&"�� ����&��& ��&�(���(&����&����(& ����� (���� &����9�������& ��&$�� (�&-��.���&��&A� ��B��" &A�(�;4� ��&A� ���&�&,#8&�&&,�"�(& �&2&$�� �(&<@������&���� (���&;4� ��$�� (��&:�����&�&?1��&�&&=&,�������&��9�� �����<&����&������&7���&$�� � &;�� ��&�&0�++&�&&9�����& ��&� ��,�"�(& �&2&3��4&�� �(��(%&,���&(�1856$�� (�-��.���%&$������� &-�� ���&'��(����&�&$�� (�-��.���*&�A�(�&7�(�&�&7��&�&&=&,�������&��&9�� �����B��&A�(�&7�(�&�&7��&�&&&��&��� ��&������& ��&������&�����(&��& ��&(��� &����&��� & �& ��&����(��� �B��&� �� ��" &�(�&�4� ��&��� &��&��� �� ��&��&�(��(& �&(�����& ��&A�(�&7�(�&�&7��&�&&�&,�"�( �&2&$�� �(&<A� ��B��" &A�(�&;4� ��=&)�� �� ���&��&A� �� ���<&�CDEFGHIJB�(�&�""& ��&���� ���&��&��&���� (���&�������� &��&(�����& ��&���� ���&.�4�)�� �� �& ��&� �� ��" &�(�&�4� ���&,�"�(& �&2&$�� �(&<A� ��B��" &A�(�&;4� ��=)�� �� ���&��&A� �� ���<&�,�����& ��&������&�����(&����(�&,�"�(& �&2&3��4&�� �(��(%&,���&(�1�563��.���%&'��(�����&K�����&$����(&$���(*&�

Page 104: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

�������� �����

� ����������������������������� �������� �� � ��� ��!���"����� !�#

$�����%��%��������� % ��%������ �&%'%����$�����% ��%�� %'%�!�%��%&�����% ��%(�&�%)�&��%)��%�%%'%���%"&��% ��%������%�����&�*+,-.//0+12�� ��%��%&���&��%�&��&%�"%&������3014-5+0+1%67580908.-0:+,$�"�&% �%;%<�� �&%=>��&����%�%2� �&��&%?��� �&���=%(� ��@��" %(�&�%AB� ��C%D�� �� ���%��%(� �� ���E+-0F3459-%E/.GH%6I,-5HJ%E8-0K.-0+1(� �� ��" %�&�%�B� ��%��%� �� ����B%��� ����%��%�B%���L���% ��%��������%(� �� ��" %�&�%�B� ����% ���%� �� ��%������ ��B�A�% � %� �� ��" %�&�%�B� ��%����%�� % &����&%��������&B%�&��C%�����%��%�������%��%���&���"�&�%���L���% ��%��������E+-0F3459-%E/.GH%6I,-5HJ%M5.8-0K.-0+1@��%� �� ��" %�&�%�B� ��%��%��� �� ��%�"@��%�������%��%�����L��%�����% ��%�����L%�� ��%��% ��%&��� �%��� &��%L�B@��%���� ���%��%��� ����%���N+/:8O0+1%P5408/5%Q584.+08.//I%RSH5G15+8I%T75+0+1UV��L% ��%�������%��% ��%�&���&%���&�(� �� ��" %�&�%�B� ��%&�����%� �� ��C%������&%��%�&�%��% &����&���@�&�%��% ��%���� ���%�� ���%�W%��������@��%�&�%����%��%�""%" �&%�W%�������%�"% ��%���� ���%��%�� % �&���%���XB%��� �����%��% ��%���� ���C% ��%���� &����%��������Y�&%&������Y��%%����%�������%L�B%����� �� ��% ��%� �� ��" %�&�%�B� ���2� �&��&%?��� �&���%A����&%�%�Z!%�%%C%$�������%��%2�� �����[5H:K0+1@�&�%�""% ��%���� ���%��%��%���� &���%�������� %��%&�����% ��%���� ���%L�B�$�������% ��%\&�� %2� �&��&%V��%�%]�%�%%�%$�"�&% �%;%<�� �&%=\&�� %2� �&��&%V���$�����V��C%$�������%��%2�� �����=%�

Page 105: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

�������� �����

� ����������������������������� �������� �� � ��� ��!���"����� #�#

$�����% ��%�����&�%'%�!��(�����% ��%����%"&��% ��%����%�����%'%�#��)�����% ��%*� �&��&%+��� �&���%,����&%�%�-!%�%%'%�����% ��%�����&�%'%�!�%"&��% ��%.&�� %*� �&��&%(���%/�%�%%�0123455617*�� ��%��%&���&��%�&��&%�"%&������

Page 106: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Windshield Wiper System"

⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper, Bringing into Service Position"

⇒ Chapter "Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting"

⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Motor - V - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Motor, Replacing"

⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Motor, Deactivating Alternating Park Position Function"

⇒ Chapter "Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Servicing"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

1 of 14 1/30/2019 10:44 AM

Page 107: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Joint-Free Windshield WiperRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Wiper Blade, Removingand Installing" .

1.

Wiper ArmsRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Arms,Removing and Installing" .Park Position, Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Arms,Adjusting" .Service position. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper, Bringing intoService Position" .

2.

Nut20 NmQuantity: 2

3.

Nut5 Nm

4.

Bolt8 NmQuantity: 2

5.

Wiper Frame with LinkageRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Motor- V - , Removing and Installing" .

6.

Windshield Wiper Motor - V - With the Wiper Motor Control Module - J400 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield WiperMotor, Replacing" .

7.

No Illustration

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

2 of 14 1/30/2019 10:44 AM

Page 108: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Windshield Wiper Motor - V - bolts to the wiper frame with linkage: 8 Nm

Windshield wiper motor crank to windshield wiper motor shaft: 18 Nm

There is a risk of damaging the front lid by moving the windshield wipers back into the home position.

Do not drive a vehicle with windshield wiper arms folded up.The windshield wipers automatically go back into their rest position when the wiper switch is activated or when driving fasterthan 6 km/h.

Danger of windshield wiper blade damage due to freezing.

If frost is present, check to see if the windshield wiper blades are frozen.

If the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - is to be run during the work procedure, the hood must be completely closed, otherwise thevoltage supply of the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - will be interrupted.

Briefly turn the ignition on and then off again.

Turn the windshield wiper lever in the “one-touch wiping position” within 10 seconds.

The windshield wipers run in the “service position”.

Removing

CAUTION

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

3 of 14 1/30/2019 10:44 AM

Page 109: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Bring the windshield wiper into the service position. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper, Bringing into Service Position" .

Risk of damaging the wiper blade.

Joint-free windshield wipers are very flexible. Only grasp the wiper blades in the area for the wiper blade mount to lift themaway from the windshield.

Lift the windshield wiper arm off the windshield.

Press the clip in direction of » -arrow A- and slide the wiper blade » -1-off of the windshield wiper arm » -2- in direction of » -arrow B- .

Remove the wiper blade » -1- .

Installing

There is a risk of damaging the body.

The driver and front passenger side wiper blades are different lengths.

Install in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

CAUTION

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

4 of 14 1/30/2019 10:44 AM

Page 110: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Guide the wiper blade » -1- parallel into the windshield wiper arm » -2- indirection of » -arrow- . Make sure to slide the wiper blade » -1- on until theclips audibly lock in the wiper arm » -2- .

To leave the “service position:”Operate the windshield wiper switch.

OrDrive the vehicle faster than 6 km/h (3.7 mph).

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Puller - Wiper Arm Kit - T10369 -

- T10369/1 -

Removing

Risk of damaging the wiper arm shaft.

The wiper arm shaft can get damaged when removing the windshield wiper arms without using the - T10369/1 - .

If the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - is to be run during the work procedure, the hood must be closed, otherwise the voltage supplyof the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - will be interrupted.

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Pry out the caps » -arrows- using a screwdriver.

Loosen the nuts » -arrows- several turns.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

5 of 14 1/30/2019 10:44 AM

Page 111: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Position the - T10369/1 - on the windshield wiper arm » -1- as shown.

Position the thrust piece » -2- on the wiper arm shaft.

Rotate the bolt » -3- clockwise until the wiper arm » -1- is removed fromthe wiper arm shaft.

Remove the nut completely and remove the windshield wiper arm » -1- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Adjust the windshield wiper arms. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting" .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331 -If the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - is to be run during the work procedure, the hood must be closed, otherwise the voltage supplyof the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - will be interrupted.

ProcedureRemove the windshield wiper arms. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing" .

Turn on the ignition.

Activate “one-tap wiping” and let the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - run into its end position.

Turn off the ignition.

Position the wiper arm with wiper blade installed at the wiper arm shaft.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

6 of 14 1/30/2019 10:44 AM

Page 112: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Align the wiper blade as follows on the windshield.

The dimensions give the distance of the wiper blade tips to the plenumchamber cover on the lower edge of the windshield.

Dimension » -a- + 10 mm ± 5 mm.

Dimension » -b- + 10 mm ± 5 mm.

Tighten the nuts » -arrows- .

Turn on the ignition.

Activate “one-touch wiping” and let the windshield wiper arms run into theirend position.

Turn off the ignition.

Check the wiper arm adjustment again and if necessary adjust.

Press the caps onto the wiper arms.

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Windshield Wiper System"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Wrench 1410 - VAG1410 -If the control module is being replaced, select the Replacing function for the respective control module in Guided Fault Findingusing the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the windshield wiper arms. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing" .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

7 of 14 1/30/2019 10:44 AM

Page 113: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the plenum chamber cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.50 [Bulkhead; Overview - Bulkhead] .

Release and disconnect the connector » -1- .

Remove the bolts and nut » -arrows- .

Pivot the wiper frame » -2- upward out of the vehicle.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Adjust the windshield wiper arms. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting" .

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Windshield Wiper System"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Pry Lever - 80-200 -

Torque Wrench 1410 - VAG1410 -

Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331 -

Risk of injury.

When operating an uncovered windshield wiper system there is a risk of pinching.The windshield wiper system can only be operated when installed.

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

8 of 14 1/30/2019 10:44 AM

Page 114: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

There is a risk of damaging the hood and the windshield wiper arm.

By operating the windshield wiper system with the hood open, pay attention that the is enough clearance to movingcomponents.

So that the windshield wiper system can be operated with the front lid open, the latch must be engaged in the »closed« position.

RemovingDeactivate the wiper motor alternating park position. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Motor, Deactivating AlternatingPark Position Function" .

Remove the wiper frame together with the linkage. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Motor - V - , Removing andInstalling" .

Pry the operating rod » -1- on the ball joint from the motor crank »-arrow- using the - 80-200 - .

Remove the nut » -1- .

Remove the motor crank » -2- from the windshield wiper motor shaft.

Remove the bolts » -arrows- .

Remove the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - from the windshield wiperframe.

InstallingConnect the connector to the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - .

Turn on the ignition.

Activate “one-tap wiping” and let the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - run into its end position.

Turn off the ignition.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

9 of 14 1/30/2019 10:44 AM

Page 115: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release and disconnect the connector.

Install the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - on the windshield wiper frame.

Install the bolts » -arrows- .

Mount the motor crank » -4- onto the windshield wiper motor shaft » -2-so that the three points » -1 to 3- are in a line.

Tighten the nut » -2- .

Connect the operating rod » -1- on the motor crank on the ball joint »-arrow- .

Install the windshield wiper frame. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield WiperMotor - V - , Removing and Installing" .

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Windshield Wiper System"

The windshield wiper system is equipped with the APP function (alternating park position).The APP function causes the wiper, after every second time it is switched off, to move up one level after reaching the lowestposition.To install the motor crank on the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - , it is necessary to shut off the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - in thelower park position. This is attained by deactivating the APP function.Note the following:

An activation of APP function is not possible.

APP function is automatically activated after 100 wiping cycles. This applies to Windshield Wiper Motors - V - in which theAPP function was deactivated as well as new Windshield Wiper Motors - V - .

Deactivate the wiper motor alternating park position using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

After successfully completing coding/deactivating of the APP function, Windshield Wiper Motor - V - is located in the lower parkposition after the next wiper cycle.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

10 of 14 1/30/2019 10:44 AM

Page 116: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - can be installed again if it is not damaged when removing it from the retaining plateon the windshield (for example when replacing the windshield). If the windshield is cracked in the area near the Rain/LightRecognition Sensor - G397 - , then the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - cannot be used again.Store the removed Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - in a dust-free area and keep the silicone connecting pads from gettingdirty.The Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - cannot be optionally installed. Refer to the Parts Catalog for the correct Rain/LightRecognition Sensor - G397 - .

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the interior rearview mirror. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.68 [Interior Rearview Mirror; Overview - Interior RearviewMirror] .

Remove the wire cover over the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - .

Disconnect the connector » -A- from the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor- G397 - » -1- .

Not every Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - has the opening » -3- . Ifthis opening is not there, pry it out at another suitable location.

Pry the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - » -1- out of the retainingplate » -2- at the opening » -3- using a suitable flat-head screwdriver.

While removing, the complete Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - andnot just the upper shell of the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - mustbe pried off.

Lay the removed Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - until it is reinstalled so that the connecting pad is not contaminatedwith dust or other deposits.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

11 of 14 1/30/2019 10:44 AM

Page 117: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Always clean the windshield surface inside the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - holder before installing. Remove anytraces of the connecting pad still remaining on the windshield.Surface (connecting pads) of Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - must not be contaminated or damaged when installing.Replace the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - if the connecting pad is damaged. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Rain/LightRecognition Sensor, Servicing" .

Surface (connecting pads) of the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - must not be contaminated when installing.If the surface (connecting pads) of the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - is contaminated, it can be potentially cleaned by“applying” and then “pulling off” one or more adhesive strips.

Always clean the windshield inside the retaining plate.

Remove the cap from the new Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - .

Insert the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - » -1- into the retainingplate on the windshield » -2- and then press it in securely.

Approximately 10 minutes after installing, there must be no air bubblesbetween the windshield and connecting pads for the Rain/Light RecognitionSensor - G397 - .

Connect the connector » -A- and install the wire cover to secure theRain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - » -1- .

Install the interior rearview mirror. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.68 [Interior Rearview Mirror; Overview - Interior Rearview Mirror] .

If the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - was replaced, it must becoded use the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester .

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

12 of 14 1/30/2019 10:44 AM

Page 118: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Only the housing and optical unit can be replaced if the optical unit (coupling cushion) is damaged.The housing and optical unit are always delivered with mounting clips. Remove these clips if they are not needed.

ProcedureRemove the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing andInstalling" .

The sensor electronics may be damaged.

Be careful not to insert the screwdriver all the way through the housing up to the sensor electronics.Do not touch the sensor electronics.

Press the tab » -2- on both sides and separate the upper section » -1-with optical unit from the lower section » -3- .

Remove the rain sensor electronics at the connector » -4- from the oldlower section and install the new electronics the exact same way.

The sensor electronics may be damaged.

Do not touch the optical unit.

Assemble the new housing upper section with optical unit and protective cover with the housing lower section.

CAUTION

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

13 of 14 1/30/2019 10:44 AM

Page 119: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Pry the clip and bracket » -1- out of the rain sensor housing » -2- with ascrewdriver.

Install the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor - G397 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter"Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Installing" .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

14 of 14 1/30/2019 10:44 AM

Page 120: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Horn"

⇒ Chapter "High Tone Horn - H2 - /Low Tone Horn - H7 - , Removing and Installing"

Nut10 NmTightening specification for the bracket bolt to longitudinal member: 20Nm

1.

High Tone Horn - H2 - /Low Tone Horn - H7 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "High Tone Horn - H2 - /Low Tone Horn - H7 - , Removing and Installing" .

2.

The High Tone Horn - H2 - /Low Tone Horn - H7 - are activated by the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - .The High Tone Horn - H2 - is installed under the longitudinal member on the right and the Low Tone Horn - H7 - on the left.

Remove the High Tone Horn - H2 - .Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the noise insulation. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.66 [Noise Insulation; Overview - Noise Insulation] .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

1 of 2 1/30/2019 10:40 AM

Page 121: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Disconnect the connector » -3- .

Remove the nut » -1- and the High Tone Horn - H2 - » -2- .

Low Tone Horn - H7 - , RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the noise insulation. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.66 [Noise Insulation; Overview - Noise Insulation] .

Release and disconnect the connector » -2- .

Remove the nut » -1- and remove the Low Tone Horn - H7 - » -3- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:When installing, position the horns so that they are not touching any surrounding components.Check the horns using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Horn"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

2 of 2 1/30/2019 10:40 AM

Page 122: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Protective Eyewear

Gloves

When Performing Assembly Work on HID Headlamps, Note the FollowingInformation on Dangerous High Voltage/Currents. Refer to ⇒ Anchor .

Notes on pressure, temperature and radiation/electric arcs. Refer to ⇒ Anchor .

Assembly instructions on HID headlamp bulbs. Refer to ⇒ Anchor .

Disposal Regulations for HID Headlamp Bulbs. Refer to ⇒ Anchor .

Always disconnect the Battery - A - before working on any HID headlamp components marked with the yellow high-voltagesymbols. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment; Rep. Gr.27 [Battery; Battery, Removing and Installing] .

Then switch the low beams on and back off. This removes any possible residual voltage.

The HID headlamp control module must never be operated without an HID headlamp bulb.

Due to the high-voltage (over 28000 V when igniting the lamp) and temperatures, the HID headlamp bulb should only beoperated inside the headlamp housing.

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

1 of 4 1/30/2019 10:46 AM

Page 123: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Never change an HID headlamp bulb if not familiar with the corresponding steps, safety precautions and the tool.

Warnings for Dangerous High-Voltage and Currents

Light system control modules, connectors or components in the bulb socket area produce life-threatening high-voltage.

The control module and igniter may be used only on the HID headlamp bulb.

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

When working on headlamp system, ensure all components are without voltage, including relieving residual voltage afterswitching headlamps off.

Residual voltages are discharged by switching low beams on and off again after ignition key was removed.

Make sure lamps cannot be switched on when working on headlamp system.

Notes on Pressure, Temperature and Radiation/Glare

WARNING

WARNING

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

2 of 4 1/30/2019 10:46 AM

Page 124: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

HID Headlamp Bulb must only be operated in headlamp housing (it offers protection against touching extremely hot lamp,absorption of UV radiation, prevention of glare, protection against explosion).

The glass HID headlamp bulb glass can become very hot - risk of burning!

Avoid looking directly into light beam, since UV radiation from the HID lamp is approximately 2.5 times higher than that ofstandard halogen lamps.

Avoid looking into the light beam (danger of glare); vision can be impaired for a longer period of time.

Avoid contact with burst bulb glass.

H7 bulbs and HID bulbs are under pressure and can burst when replaced, which increases the risk of injury.

Always wear protective eyewear and gloves when removing and installing HID headlamp bulbs.

Assembly Instructions on HID Headlamp Bulbs

WARNING

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

3 of 4 1/30/2019 10:46 AM

Page 125: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Before replacing an HID bulb, the corresponding electrical consumer must always be switched off.Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.Do not touch an HID headlamp bulb glass with bare hands, use clean gloves. The remaining fingerprint would evaporate due tothe heat of the operated HID headlamp bulb and condense on the reflector which would impair headlamp luminosity.An HID headlamp bulb must be replaced with an HID headlamp bulb of the same version. Bulb identification can be found onthe bulb socket or on the bulb glass.Connectors must engage correctly during installation and make sure the connection is secure.

Disposal Regulations for HID Headlamp Bulbs

HID headlamp bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous waste, never dispose of HID lamps via domestic waste.

HID headlamp bulbs contain metallic mercury (Hg) and traces of thallium, they must not be destroyed.

These components must be returned for proper recycling in accordance with national legislation.

Dispose of only in the designated containers at the responsible collection point.

CAUTION

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

4 of 4 1/30/2019 10:46 AM

Page 126: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Headlamps"

⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Headlamp Carrier Plate, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Adjusting"

⇒ Chapter "Headlamp Installation Position, Correcting"

⇒ Chapter "Headlamps, Changing from RHD to LHD"

⇒ Chapter "Headlamps, Changing from LHD to RHD"

⇒ Chapter "Left/Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48 - / - V49 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Left and Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb - M30 - / - M32 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Left/Right HID Headlamp Bulb - L13 - / - L14 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Left and Right Position Lamp Bulb - M1 - / - M3 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Left and Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L174 - / - L175 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Left and Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LED Module - L176 - / - L177 - , Removing andInstalling"

⇒ Chapter "Left and Right HID Headlamp Control Module - J343 - / - J344 - , Removing and Installing"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

1 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 127: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Headlamps, Halogen Headlamps"

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Headlamps, HID Headlamps"

Overview - Headlamps, Halogen Headlamps

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

2 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 128: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

HeadlampsRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removingand Installing" .Carrier plate, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "HeadlampCarrier Plate, Removing and Installing"Headlamp installation position, correcting. Refer to ⇒ Chapter"Headlamp Installation Position, Correcting" .Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Adjusting" .

1.

Headlamp Beam Adjustment MotorLeft Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48 - Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V49 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp BeamAdjusting Motors, Removing and Installing, Halogen Headlamps" .

2.

Position Lamp Bulb/Daytime Running Lamp BulbLeft Position Lamp Bulb - M1 - /Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb- L174 - Right Position Lamp Bulb - M3 - /Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb- L175 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Left/Right PositionLamp Bulb - M1 - / - M3 - , Removing and Installing, HalogenHeadlamp" .

3.

Socket4. Housing Cover5. Low Beam Headlamp Bulb/High Beam Headlamp Bulb

Left Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M29 - /Left High Beam HeadlampBulb - M30 - Right Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M31 - /Right High Beam HeadlampBulb - M32 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Low Beam HeadlampBulb, Removing and Installing" .

6.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

3 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 129: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

No IllustrationCarrier plate bolt tightening specification: 5 Nm

Access cover bolt tightening specification: 2 Nm

Overview - Headlamps, HID Headlamps

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

4 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 130: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Position Lamp BulbLeft Position Lamp Bulb - M1 - Right Position Lamp Bulb - M3 - LED, cannot be replaced

1.

HeadlampsRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removingand Installing" .Carrier plate, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "HeadlampCarrier Plate, Removing and Installing"Headlamp installation position, correcting. Refer to ⇒ Chapter"Headlamp Installation Position, Correcting" .Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Adjusting" .

2.

Headlamp Beam Adjustment MotorLeft Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V48 - Right Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motor - V49 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp BeamAdjustment Motors, Removing and Installing, HID Headlamp" .

3.

Housing Cover4. Bolt

3 NmQuantity: 2

5.

Cap6. HID Headlamp Bulb

Left HID Headlamp Bulb - L13 - Right HID Headlamp Bulb - L14 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Left/Right HIDHeadlamp Bulb - L13 - / - L14 - , Removing and Installing" .

7.

Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LED Module8.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

5 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 131: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

High voltage increases the risk of fatal injury.

Pay attention to usage and safety information for HID headlamps. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "HID Headlamps Usage and SafetyPrecautions" .

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

The headlamp is locked onto the carrier plate » -1- with the bracket » -arrowA- .Use a (Phillips head) screwdriver to release the socket » -arrow B- .

Turn the screwdriver » -1- about 50 degrees in the direction of the »-arrow- in order to loosen the headlamp from the locking mechanism.

Remove the headlamp forward from the opening in the body.

Release and disconnect the connector from the headlamp.

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

6 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 132: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Connect and lock the connector » -2- to the headlamp.

Position the headlamp on the guides » -1- and “carefully” slide it in all theway till it stops.

Turn the screwdriver » -1- about 50 degrees in the opposite direction ofthe » -arrow- in order to lock the headlamp.

The headlamp is locked when the “click” noise is heard.Make sure the gap dimensions are even in the headlamp installationposition.

If the gap dimensions are uneven, then adjust the headlamp installationposition. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp Installation Position, Correcting" .

Check the headlamp functions.

Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp. Referto ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Adjusting" .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331 -The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.The adjusting mechanisms on the carrier plate make it possible to correct the position of the headlamp.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

7 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 133: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

RemovingTurn the steering all the way to the right.

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

Remove the bolt » -arrow- on the access cover » -1- and remove theaccess cover » -1- .

Remove the bolts » -arrows- on the carrier plate » -1- .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

8 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 134: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the upper side bolt » -arrow- on the carrier plate » -1- .

Remove the carrier plate » -1- forward.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Install the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

Make sure the gap around the headlamp is even all the way around. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp Installation Position,Correcting" .

If the gap dimensions are uneven, then adjust the headlamp installation position. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp InstallationPosition, Correcting" .

Check the headlamp functions.

Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Adjusting" .

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Headlamps, Halogen Headlamps"

Refer to ⇒ Booklet14.3 [Procedure Descriptions] .

When determining the installation position of the headlamp, if the gaps between the headlamp and body are uneven, theinstallation position must be corrected.It is not necessary to remove the front bumper cover to adjust the headlamps.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

9 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 135: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The procedure is described for the left side. The procedure on the right side is identical.

ProcedureTurn the steering all the way to the right.

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Loosen the bolt » -arrow- on the upper carrier plate.

Remove the bolt » -arrow- on the access cover » -1- and remove theaccess cover » -1- .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

10 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 136: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Loosen the bolts » -arrows- on the rear headlamp.

Turn the adjusting bushings » -arrow- in and out on the carrier plate toadjust the headlamp so that it is flush with the vehicle body.

Check and correct the headlamp position and make sure the gapdimensions are even.

Check the headlamp functions.

Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp. Referto ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Adjusting" .

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Headlamps, Halogen Headlamps"

⇒ Chapter "Headlamp Beam Adjusting Motors, Removing and Installing, Halogen Headlamps"

⇒ Chapter "Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motors, Removing and Installing, HID Headlamp"

Headlamp Beam Adjusting Motors, Removing and Installing, Halogen HeadlampsThe removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

11 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 137: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

Turn the housing cover » -2- on the headlamp » -1- in the direction of the» -arrow- and remove it.

Place the suitable hex socket » -2- into the adjustment element » -3- andturn the hex socket clockwise » -arrow- . The headlamp reflector movesforward below.

Release and disconnect the connector on the adjustment motor » -1- .

Turn the adjustment motor » -1- in the direction of the » -arrow- .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

12 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 138: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Push the adjustment motor » -1- downward in direction of » -arrow- andremove it from the joint » -2- .

Remove the adjustment motor from the headlamp.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

Install the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Adjusting" .

Headlamp Beam Adjustment Motors, Removing and Installing, HID HeadlampSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

13 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 139: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the bolts » -arrows- .

Remove the housing cover » -2- from the headlamp » -1- .

HID Headlamp Bulb, Removing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Left/Right HIDHeadlamp Bulb - L13 - / - L14 - , Removing and Installing" .

Release the adjustment motor » -1- with a small screwdriver:

Turn in the direction of » -arrow 2- on the left headlamp.

Turn in the opposite direction of » -arrow 2- on the right headlamp;

Move the adjustment motor toward the rear when the end position isreached.

Push the ball head of the adjustment axle out of the joint » -1- andremove the adjustment motor from the bayonet » -2- .

Release and disconnect the connector on the adjustment motor.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

14 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 140: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

Install the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

Check the headlamp functions.

Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Adjusting" .

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Headlamps, HID Headlamps"

The Left High Beam Headlamp Bulb - M29 - /Right Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M31 - also contain the Left High Beam HeadlampBulb - M30 - /Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb - M32 - .The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

15 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 141: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Turn the housing cover » -2- on the headlamp » -1- in the direction of the» -arrow- and remove it.

Disconnect the connector » -1- from the Left Low Beam Headlamp Bulb- M29 - » -3- in the direction of the » -arrow B- .

Push the wire clip » -2- forward and in the direction of the » -arrow A- .

Unclip the wire clip and remove the Left Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M29 -» -3- from the headlamp.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

Do not touch bulb glass of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the bulb glass which, when the bulb isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.Use clean cloth gloves to insert the bulbs.During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

16 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 142: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Insert the Left Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M29 - into the headlamp and lock it with the wire clip.

Install the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

Check the headlamp functions.

Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Adjusting" .

The Left High Beam Headlamp Bulb - M29 - /Right Low Beam Headlamp Bulb - M31 - also contain the Left High Beam HeadlampBulb - M30 - /Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb - M32 - .

Removing and installing the low beam headlamp bulb. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing andInstalling" .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -

High-voltage poses an extremely dangerous risk, a risk of injury and an environmental hazard.

Pay attention to usage and safety information for HID headlamps. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "HID Headlamps Usage and SafetyPrecautions" .

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

17 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 143: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

There are pressures from 7 bar (101.52 psi) (cold) to 100 bar (1450.3 psi) (hot) in the bulb glass of the HID bulb. Temperaturesup to 700 °C (1,292 °F) are reached on the hot bulb glass.The bulb glass can explode and there is a danger of burning.Always wear protective eyewear and gloves when removing and installing HID headlamp bulbs.

Remove the bolts » -arrows- .

Remove the housing cover » -2- from the headlamp » -1- .

Tilt the spring clip » -2- in direction of » -arrow- .

Pull the HID headlamp bulb » -1- toward the rear out of the reflector.

Release and disconnect the connector » -3- on the HID headlamp bulb »-1- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

18 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 144: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Do not touch the bulb glass when installing a bulb. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the light isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.The bulb glass of the HID headlamp must not be exposed to any mechanical strain. The bulb glass is extremely sensitive and isalso under high pressure.Avoid looking directly into the light beam, since the UV rays given off by the HID lamp are approximately 2.5 times strongerthan those of a halogen bulb.During installation, ensure proper seating of the cap. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

Installation position: the electrical connection points downward.

Install the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

Check the headlamp functions.

Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Adjusting" .

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Headlamps, HID Headlamps"

⇒ Chapter "Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb - M1 - / - M3 - , Removing and Installing, Halogen Headlamp"

⇒ Chapter "Left and Right Position Lamp Bulb - M1 - / - M3 - , Removing and Installing, HID Headlamp"

Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb - M1 - / - M3 - , Removing and Installing, Halogen Headlamp

CAUTION

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

19 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 145: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

Turn the housing cover » -2- on the headlamp » -1- in the direction of the» -arrow- and remove it.

Remove the socket » -2- from the reflector in direction of » -arrow-together with the Left Position Lamp Bulb - M1 - .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

20 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 146: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Pull the Left Position Lamp Bulb - M1 - » -2- in the direction of the »-arrow- straight out of the bulb socket » -1- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

Do not touch bulb glass of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the bulb glass which, when the bulb isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.Use clean cloth gloves to insert the bulbs.During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

Install the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

Check the headlamp functions.

Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Adjusting" .

Left and Right Position Lamp Bulb - M1 - / - M3 - , Removing and Installing, HID HeadlampThe Left Position Lamp Bulb - M1 - and the Right Position Lamp Bulb - M3 - are LEDs and are integrated in the headlamp.Changing the LEDs is not possible. The headlamp must be completely replaced.

Headlamps, Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

21 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 147: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The Left Position Lamp Bulb - M1 - /Right Position Lamp Bulb - M3 - also contains the Left Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L174 -/Right Daytime Running Lamp Bulb - L175 - .

Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb - M1 - / - M3 - , removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Left/Right Position Lamp Bulb- M1 - / - M3 - , Removing and Installing, Halogen Headlamp" .

The Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LED Module - L176 - /Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LEDModule - L177 - is only installed with HID headlamps.The Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LED Module - L176 - /Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LEDModule - L177 - is integrated in the headlamp. Changing the LEDs is not possible. The headlamp must be completely replaced.

Headlamps, Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -

High-voltage poses an extremely dangerous risk, a risk of injury and an environmental hazard.

Pay attention to usage and safety information for HID headlamps. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "HID Headlamps Usage and SafetyPrecautions" .It is necessary to disconnect the battery wire strap before working on HID headlamp components. These parts are marked withyellow high-voltage symbols.

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.

Removing

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

22 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 148: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

Remove the screws » -arrows- from the Left Hid Headlamp ControlModule - J343 - » -2- .

Remove the Left HID Headlamp Control Module - J343 - » -2- from theheadlamp » -1- .

Remove the connection for the Left Hid Headlamp Control Module - J343 -.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Make sure the seal fits correctly when installing the HID headlamp control module. Water getting in the headlamp will causedamage.

Make sure the seal between the control module and the headlamp is not damaged.

Install the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Removing and Installing" .

Check the headlamp functions.

Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp, Adjusting" .

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Headlamps, HID Headlamps"

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

23 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 149: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Fog Lamps"

⇒ Chapter "Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Left/Right Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L22 - / - L23 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Fog Lamp, Adjusting"

Bolt2 Nm

1.

Fog Lamp Bulb and Cornering Lamp BulbLeft Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L22 - and Left Cornering Lamp Bulb- L148 - Right Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L23 - and Right Cornering Lamp Bulb- L149 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Fog Lamp, Removingand Installing" .

2.

Fog LampRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Left/Right Front FogLamp Bulb - L22 - / - L23 - , Removing and Installing" .

3.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

24 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 150: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The following illustrations depict the removal and installation of the left fog lamp. The right fog lamp is removed and installedthe same way.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Unclip the cover from the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.63 [Front Bumper] .

Remove the bolt » -2- .

Pivot the fog lamp » -1- out of the front bumper cover in the direction ofthe » -arrow- . Pay attention to the different wire lengths still connected.

Release and disconnect the connector on the fog lamp » -1- .

Remove the fog lamp.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Perform a function test.

Check and correct the fog lamp adjustment. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Fog Lamp, Adjusting" .

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Fog Lamps"

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

25 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 151: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The Left Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L22 - /Right Front Fog Lamp Bulb - L23 - also take over the function of the Left CorneringLamp Bulb - L148 - /Right Cornering Lamp Bulb - L149 - .

The following illustrations depict removal and installation on the left fog lamp.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the fog lamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Fog Lamp, Removing and Installing" .

Turn the bulb socket » -1- in the direction of the » -arrow- and remove it.

The bulb is permanently attached to the bulb socket and cannot be replacedseparately.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

26 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 152: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

Do not touch bulb glass of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the bulb glass which, when the bulb isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.Use clean cloth gloves to insert the bulbs.Make sure the bulb socket is seated correctly when installing them. Water getting in the fog lamp will cause damage.

Perform a function test.

Check and correct the fog lamp adjustment. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Fog Lamp, Adjusting" .

Fog Lamps, Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ Booklet14.3 [Procedure Descriptions] .

⇒ Chapter "Front Side Marker Lamp, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb, Removing and Installing"

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the wheel housing liner far enough so that the side marker lamp can be reached. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.Gr.66 [Wheel Housing Liner; Overview - Front Wheel Housing Liner] .

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

27 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 153: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the bulb socket » -3- and bulb » -2- from the side marker lamp» -1- .

Press the tabs in the direction of the » -arrow- and release the sidemarker lamp » -1- .

Remove the side marker lamp » -1- outward from the front bumper cover.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

Do not touch bulb glass of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the bulb glass which, when the bulb isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.Use clean cloth gloves to insert the bulbs.During installation, ensure proper seating of the cap. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

Check the functionality of the side marker lamp.

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

28 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 154: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the wheel housing liner far enough so that the side marker lamp can be reached. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.Gr.66 [Wheel Housing Liner; Overview - Front Wheel Housing Liner] .

Remove the bulb socket » -3- and bulb » -2- from the side marker lamp» -1- .

Remove the bulb » -2- from the bulb socket » -3- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

Do not touch bulb glass of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the bulb glass which, when the bulb isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.Use clean cloth gloves to insert the bulbs.During installation, ensure proper seating of the cap. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

Check the functionality of the side marker lamp.

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror"

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

29 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 155: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Turn Signal, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Driver/Front Passenger Exterior Rearview Mirror Turn Signal Bulb - L131 - / - L132 - , Removing and Installing"

Exterior Rearview MirrorOverview. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.66 [Exterior RearviewMirror; Overview - Exterior Rearview Mirror] .

1.

Turn SignalRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Turn Signal, Removingand Installing" .

2.

Bolt2 NmQuantity: 2

3.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.The entire exterior rearview mirror turn signal must be replaced if an LED is faulty.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the mirror cap. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.66 [Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror Cap, Removing and Installing] .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

30 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 156: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the bolts » -arrows- .

Remove the turn signal » -1- toward the front from the mirror base at thesame time pay attention to the wires.

Release and disconnect the connector on the turn signal » -1- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Perform a function test.

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror"

The Driver Exterior Rearview Mirror Turn Signal Bulb - L131 - /Front Passenger Exterior Rearview Mirror Turn Signal Bulb - L132 - are equipped with LED. If faulty the entire turn signal must be replaced.

Removing and installing the turn signal. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Turn Signal, Removing and Installing" .

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Front Turn Signal Lamps"

⇒ Chapter "Front Turn Signals, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Front Turn Signal, Removing and Installing"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

31 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 157: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Connector1. Turn Signal Bulb Socket2. Front Turn Signal Bulb

Left Front Turn Signal Bulb - M5 - Right Front Turn Signal Bulb - M7 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Front Turn Signal,Removing and Installing" .

3.

Turn SignalRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Front Turn Signals,Removing and Installing" .

4.

Bolt2 Nm

5.

Illustrations depict removal and installation of the left turn signal. The right turn signal is removed and installed the same way.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Unclip the cover from the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.63 [Front Bumper] .

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

32 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 158: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the bolt » -2- .

Pivot the turn signal » -1- out of the front bumper cover in the direction ofthe » -arrow- . Pay attention to the different wire lengths still connected.

Release and disconnect the connector on the turn signal » -1- .

Remove the turn signal » -1- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Front Turn Signal Lamps"

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the front turn signals. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Front Turn Signals, Removing and Installing" .

Turn bulb socket and bulb » -1- all the way in the direction of the »-arrow- . Remove it towards the rear and out from the housing.

Push the turn signal bulb into the bulb socket, turn it to the left and removeit from the bulb socket.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

33 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 159: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

Do not touch bulb glass of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the bulb glass which, when the bulb isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.Use clean cloth gloves to insert the bulbs.Make sure the bulb socket is seated correctly when installing them. Water getting in the turn signal will cause damage.

Check the functionality of the turn signal.

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Body Tail Lamps"

⇒ Chapter "Bulb Holder, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Rear Fog Lamps, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Left/Right Rear Fog Lamp Bulb - L46 - / - L47 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Left/Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb - M21 - / - M22 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Back-Up Lamp Bulb, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Installing"

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

34 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 160: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Body Tail Lamps, with Bulbs"

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Body Tail Lamps, with LED"

Overview - Body Tail Lamps, with Bulbs

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

35 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 161: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Left Tail Lamp - MX3 - /Right Tail Lamp - MX4 - Left Tail Lamp - MX3 - Right Tail Lamp - MX4 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Tail Lamp, Removingand Installing" .

1.

Left Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb - M21 - /Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb - M22 - Left Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb - M21 - Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb - M22 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Left and RightBrake/Tail Lamp Bulb - M21 - / - M22 - , Removing and Installing, TailLamps with Bulbs" .

2.

Left Rear Turn Signal Bulb - M6 - /Right Rear Turn Signal Bulb - M8 - Left Rear Turn Signal Bulb - M6 - Right Rear Turn Signal Bulb - M8 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Turn Signal Bulb,Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with Bulbs" .

3.

Left Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M16 - /Right Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M17 - Left Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M16 - Right Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M17 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Back-Up Lamp Bulb,Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with Bulbs" .

4.

Bulb HolderRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Bulb Holder, Removingand Installing" .

5.

Bolt2 NmQuantity: 7

6.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

36 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 162: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Overview - Body Tail Lamps, with LEDLeft Tail Lamp - MX3 - /Right Tail Lamp - MX4 -

Left Tail Lamp - MX3 - Right Tail Lamp - MX4 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Tail Lamp, Removingand Installing" .

1.

Fastening Element2 Nm

2.

Turn Signal Bulb Socket3. Left Rear Turn Signal Bulb - M6 - /Right Rear Turn Signal Bulb - M8 -

Left Rear Turn Signal Bulb - M6 - Right Rear Turn Signal Bulb - M8 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Turn Signal Bulb,Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with LEDs" .

4.

Back-Up Lamp Bulb Socket5. Left Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M16 - /Right Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M17 -

Left Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M16 - Right Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M17 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Back-Up Lamp Bulb,Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with LEDs" .

6.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the tail lamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing" .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

37 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 163: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the bolts » -arrows- and remove the bulb holder » -1- from thetail lamp housing.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Body Tail Lamps, with Bulbs"

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Vehicles with Subwoofer - R211 - and Right Tail Lamp.Remove the Subwoofer - R211 - . Refer to ⇒ Communication ; Rep. Gr.91 [Sound System; Component Location Overview -Sound System] .

All Vehicles

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

38 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 164: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the cover inside the side trim panel.

Remove the screw » -1- from the tail lamp » -2- and then remove the taillamp » -2- outward.

Disconnect the connector » -3- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Check the gap dimensions to the body.

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Body Tail Lamps, with Bulbs"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.

RemovingLoosen the rear wheel housing liner only in the area of the rear bumper cover, do not remove completely. Refer to ⇒ BodyExterior; Rep. Gr.66 [Wheel Housing Liner; Rear Wheel Housing Liner, Removing and Installing] .

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

39 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 165: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release and disconnect the connector » -1- .

Unclip the connector » -1- from the rear bumper cover.

Remove the bolt » -2- .

Release the retainers » -4- .

At the same time remove the rear fog lamp » -3- toward the rear from thebumper cover.

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

Tightening Specifications

Component Tightening SpecificationRear fog lamp to rear bumper cover 2 Nm

The Left Rear Fog Lamp Bulbs - L46 - /Right Rear Fog Lamp Bulbs - L47 - are LEDs and are integrated in the rear fog lamp.Changing the LED is not possible. The rear fog lamp be completely replaced.

Rear Fog Lamps, Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Rear Fog Lamps, Removing and Installing" .

⇒ Chapter "Left and Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb - M21 - / - M22 - , Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with Bulbs"

⇒ Chapter "Left and Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb - M21 - / - M22 - , Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with LEDs"

Left and Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb - M21 - / - M22 - , Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with Bulbs

Removing

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

40 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 166: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the tail lamp bulb holder. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Bulb Holder, Removing and Installing" .

Replace the faulty bulb.

Bulbs. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Body Tail Lamps, with Bulbs" .

Installing

Do not touch the bulb glass when installing a bulb. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the light isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.

Install in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:Perform a function test for the tail lamp.

Left and Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb - M21 - / - M22 - , Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with LEDs

The Left Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb - M21 - /Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb - M22 - is designed as an LED and is integrated in the LeftTail Lamp - MX3 - /Right Tail Lamp - MX4 - . Changing the LED is not possible. The Left Tail Lamp - MX3 - /Right Tail Lamp- MX4 - must be completely replaced.

Left Tail Lamp - MX3 - /Right Tail Lamp - MX4 - , Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Tail Lamp, Removing andInstalling" .

⇒ Chapter "Back-Up Lamp Bulb, Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with Bulbs"

⇒ Chapter "Back-Up Lamp Bulb, Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with LEDs"

CAUTION

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

41 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 167: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Back-Up Lamp Bulb, Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with Bulbs

RemovingRemove the tail lamp bulb holder. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Bulb Holder, Removing and Installing" .

Replace the faulty bulb.

Bulbs. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Body Tail Lamps, with Bulbs" .

Installing

Do not touch the bulb glass when installing a bulb. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the light isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.

Install in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:Perform a function test for the tail lamp.

Back-Up Lamp Bulb, Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with LEDs

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.

RemovingRemove the Left Tail Lamp - MX3 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing" .

CAUTION

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

42 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 168: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release the bulb socket » -1- by turning it in the direction of the »-arrow- .

Remove the bulb socket » -1- together with the Left Back-Up Lamp Bulb- M16 - from the left tail lamp » -2- .

Remove the Left Back-Up Lamp Bulb - M16 - » -2- from the bulb socket» -1- .

Installing

Do not touch the bulb glass when installing a bulb. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the light isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.

Install in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:Perform a function test for the tail lamp.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

43 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 169: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with Bulbs"

⇒ Chapter "Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with LEDs"

Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with Bulbs

RemovingRemove the tail lamp bulb holder. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Bulb Holder, Removing and Installing" .

Replace the faulty bulb.

Bulbs. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Body Tail Lamps, with Bulbs" .

Installing

Do not touch the bulb glass when installing a bulb. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the light isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.

Install in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:Perform a function test for the tail lamp.

Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Installing, Tail Lamps with LEDs

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.

RemovingRemove the Left Tail Lamp - MX3 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing" .

CAUTION

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

44 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 170: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release the bulb socket » -1- by turning it in the direction of the »-arrow- .

Remove the bulb socket » -1- together with the Left Rear Turn Signal Bulb- M6 - from the left tail lamp » -2- .

Remove the Left Rear Turn Signal Bulb - M6 - » -2- from the bulb socket» -1- .

Installing

Do not touch the bulb glass when installing a bulb. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the glass which, when the light isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.

Install in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:Perform a function test for the tail lamp.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

45 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 171: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing and Installing"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Trim Release Lever - T10039 -

Hot Air Blower - VAG1416 -

Adhesive Strip Remover - VAS6349 -

Hook - T10538 -

If one of the LEDs in the High-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb - M25 - is Faulty:The individual LEDs in the High-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb - M25 - are in groups of four and are supplied with electricity as agroup.

The High-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb - M25 - is designed in such a way that it still meets legal requirements when one LEDgroup fails.

If another LED group fails, these legal requirements are no longer met.

When one LED group fails, the intact LEDs are given a higher load, by which failure of other LED groups can be assumed inthe near future.

Replace the High-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb - M25 - (Repair Procedure) if more than four separate LEDs have burned out inthe High-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb - M25 - .

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the rear lid lower trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.70 [Luggage Compartment Trim Panels; Rear Lid LowerTrim Panel, Removing and Installing] .

Warm the High-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb - M25 - all around the edge area using the - VAG1416 - to loosen the two-sidedadhesive seal.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

46 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 172: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Press the tabs » -arrows- with the screwdriver and remove theHigh-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb - M25 - » -1- outward.

At the same time carefully pry up the High-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb- M25 - with the - T10039/1 - from the rear lid.

Release and disconnect the connector » -2- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

If necessary remove any adhesive residue present from the two-sided seal with the - VAS6349 - and the adhesive remover(refer to the Parts Catalog).

The adhesive surface must be free of dust and grease.Install the High-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb - M25 - immediately after cleaning.

Remove the protective film on the seal from the High-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb - M25 - immediately before the assembly.

Insert the High-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb - M25 - into the opening in the rear lid and lightly press on it.

Carefully open the rear lid.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

47 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 173: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Using the - T10538 - , pull the retainers » -2- on the High-Mounted BrakeLamp Bulb - M25 - » -1- all the way in the direction of the » -arrow A- .

The retainers » -2- must engage with the second tab on the plate »-arrow B- .

Check the functionality of the High-Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb - M25 - .

⇒ Chapter "Left and Right License Plate Lamp - X4 - / - X5 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Left and Right License Plate Lamp Bulb - X4 - / - X5 - , Removing and Installing"

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Press the tab » -1- in the direction of the » -arrow- and remove thelicense plate lamp downward from the bumper cover.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

48 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 174: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release and disconnect the connector » -arrow- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:Insert the license plate lamp into the bumper cover so that the connector is facing toward the left side of the vehicle.

Check the function of the license plate lamp.

The entire LED must be replaced for license plate lamps with LEDs. Remove the license plate lamp. Refer to Chapter "Leftand Right License Plate Lamp - X4 - / - X5 - , Removing and Installing" .

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the license plate lamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Left and Right License Plate Lamp - X4 - / - X5 - , Removing andInstalling" .

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

49 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 175: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Turn the lamp socket » -1- in the direction of the » -arrow- to release itand pull it out of the license plate lamp.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

Do not touch bulb glass of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the bulb glass which, when the bulb isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.Use clean cloth gloves to insert the bulbs.Make sure the bulb socket is seated correctly when installing them. Water getting in the license plate lamp will cause damage.

Check the function of the license plate lamp.

⇒ Chapter "Component Location Overview - Access/Start Authorization System"

⇒ Chapter "Access/Start Authorization Control Module - J518 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Driver Exterior/Front Passenger Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor - G415 - / - G416 - , Removing and

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

50 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 176: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior - R138 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Access/Start System Antenna 2 in Vehicle Interior - R139 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Driver Access/Start System Antenna - R134 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Front Passenger Access/Start System Antenna - R135 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Access/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compartment - R137 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Access/Start System Antenna in Rear Bumper - R136 - , Removing and Installing"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

51 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 177: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Antenna Contact Point Coverage Area1. Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior - R138 -

Under the center console in front of the selector lever.Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Access/Start SystemAntenna 1 in Vehicle Interior - R138 - , Removing and Installing" .

2.

Front Passenger Side Exterior Door HandleWith Front Passenger Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor - G416 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Driver Exterior/FrontPassenger Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor - G415 - / - G416 - ,Removing and Installing" .With Front Passenger Access/Start System Antenna - R135 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Front PassengerAccess/Start System Antenna - R135 - , Removing and Installing" .

3.

Access/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compartment - R137 - Only for Beetle convertibleUnder the convertible well trimRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Access/Start SystemAntenna in Luggage Compartment - R137 - , Removing andInstalling" .

4.

Access/Start System Antenna in Rear Bumper - R136 - Behind the rear bumper coverRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Access/Start SystemAntenna in Rear Bumper - R136 - , Removing and Installing" .

5.

Access/Start System Antenna 2 in Vehicle Interior - R139 - Underneath the rear bench seatRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Access/Start SystemAntenna 2 in Vehicle Interior - R139 - , Removing and Installing" .

6.

Driver Side Exterior Door HandleDriver Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor - G415 -

7.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

52 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 178: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Access/Start Authorization Control Module - J518 - , Removing and Installing"

Access/Start Authorization Control Module - J518 - , Removing and InstallingIf the control module is being replaced, select the Replacing function for the respective control module in Guided Fault Findingusing the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the driver side footwell vent. Refer to ⇒ Heating, Ventilation andAir Conditioning; Rep. Gr.87 [Air Duct; Overview - Air Routing and AirDistribution in Vehicle Interior] .

Release the retainer » -arrow- and remove the Access/Start AuthorizationControl Module - J518 - » -3- together with the bracket » -2- from thebrake pedal bracket toward the rear. Pay attention to the wires stillconnected.

Disconnect the connector » -1- and remove the Access/StartAuthorization Control Module - J518 - » -2- from its bracket » -3- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Slide the Access/Start Authorization Control Module - J518 - » -2- intothe bracket » -3- .

Slide the bracket » -3- together with the Access/Start AuthorizationControl Module - J518 - onto the guides on the brake pedal bracket until itlatches secure.

Connect and lock the connector » -1- .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

53 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 179: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The Driver Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor - G415 - /Front Passenger Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor - G416 - areintegrated into their corresponding exterior door handles and cannot be replace separately. The entire exterior door handle mustalways be replaced if malfunctioning.

Door handle removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.57 [Door Components; Door Handle, Removing andInstalling] .

The Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior - R138 - is located under the front center console, in front of the selectormechanism.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the center console cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.68 [Center Console; Center Console, Removing andInstalling] .

Remove the Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior - R138 - »-1- upward out of the retainer in direction of » -arrow- . Pay attention to thewires still connected.

Release and disconnect the connector » -2- and remove the Access/StartSystem Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior - R138 - » -1- from the vehicle.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

54 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 180: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

It is not possible to remove the bracket for the Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior - R138 - in the centerconsole without breaking it.

When the bracket of the Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior - R138 - is removed, then a new bracket must beinstalled.

The Access/Start System Antenna 2 in Vehicle Interior - R139 - is located underneath the center rear bench seat.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the rear bench seat. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.72 [Rear Seats; Bench Seat/Single Seat, Removing andInstalling] .

Remove the Access/Start Authorization Antenna 2 in Vehicle Interior- R139 - » -1- vertically upward with a small screwdriver from the bondingin direction of » -arrow- .

Release and disconnect the connector » -2- and remove the Access/StartSystem Antenna 2 in Vehicle Interior - R139 - » -1- from the vehicle.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Clean the adhesive surface before installing the Access/Start System Antenna 2 in Vehicle Interior - R139 - .

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

55 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 181: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The Driver Access/Start System Antenna - R134 - is integrated into the exterior door handle and cannot be replaces separately iffaulty.

Door handle removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.57 [Door Components; Door Handle, Removing andInstalling] .

The Front Passenger Access/Start System Antenna - R135 - is integrated into the exterior door handle and cannot be replacesseparately if faulty.

Door handle removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.57 [Door Components; Door Handle, Removing andInstalling] .

The Access/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compartment - R137 - is located under the convertible well trim.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the convertible top compartment rear trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.70 [Convertible Top Compartment;Overview - Convertible Top Compartment] .

Remove the Access/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compartment- R137 - » -1- upward out of the grille in direction of » -arrow- with asmall screwdriver.

Disconnect the connector » -2- and remove the Access/Start SystemAntenna in Luggage Compartment - R137 - » -1- from the vehicle.

Installing

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

56 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 182: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Install in reverse order of removal.

Access/Start System Antenna in Rear Bumper - R136 - is located behind bumper cover at rear.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the rear bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.63 [Rear Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and Installing] .

Press the detents outward and pull the Access/Start Authorization Antennain Rear Bumper - R136 - » -1- out of the holder, while paying attention tothe wires that are still connected.

Release and disconnect the connector and remove the Access/StartSystem Antenna in Rear Bumper - R136 - » -1- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Steering Column Switch Module"

⇒ Chapter "Lock Cylinder, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid - N376 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Ignition/Starter Switch, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Steering Column Switch Module, Removing and Installing"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

57 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 183: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Steering Column Electronics Control Module - J527 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Turn Signal Switch - E2 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Cruise Control Switch - E45 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch - E22 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Steering Column Combination Switch Base Carrier, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Steering Lock Housing, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Steering Column Switch Module with Mechanical Ignition Switch"

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Steering Column Switch Module and Electronic Ignition Switch"

Overview - Steering Column Switch Module with Mechanical Ignition Switch

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

58 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 184: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Steering Column Electronics Control Module - J527 - With Airbag Spiral Spring/Return Spring with Slip Ring - F138 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Steering ColumnElectronics Control Module - J527 - , Removing and Installing" .

1.

Steering Column Combination Switch - E595 - With Turn Signal Switch - E2 - , Windshield Wiper Intermittent ModeSwitch - E22 - and Cruise Control Switch - E45 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Turn Signal Switch- E2 - , Removing and Installing" .

2.

Base CarrierFor the steering column combination switchRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Steering ColumnCombination Switch Base Carrier, Removing and Installing, Vehiclewith Mechanical Ignition Lock" .

3.

Shear BoltsBreak-off torque: approximately 15 NmQuantity: 2

4.

Bolt3 Nm

5.

Steering Lock HousingUsing lock cylinder and Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil - D2 - Steering Lock Housing, Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter"Steering Lock Housing, Removing and Installing" .Lock Cylinder, Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "LockCylinder, Removing and Installing"Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil - D2 - Removing and Installing.Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil, Removingand Installing, Vehicle with Mechanical Ignition Lock" .

6.

Ignition/Starter Switch - D -7.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

59 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 185: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Overview - Steering Column Switch Module and Electronic Ignition SwitchSteering Column Electronics Control Module - J527 -

Bolts: 2 NmRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Steering ColumnElectronics Control Module - J527 - , Removing and Installing" .Bolts: quantity 3

1.

Steering Column Combination Switch - E595 - With Turn Signal Switch - E2 - , Windshield Wiper Intermittent ModeSwitch - E22 - and Cruise Control Switch - E45 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Turn Signal Switch- E2 - , Removing and Installing" .

2.

Base CarrierFor the steering column combination switchRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Steering ColumnCombination Switch Base Carrier, Removing and Installing, Vehicleswith Electronic Ignition Lock" .

3.

Shear BoltsBreak-off torque: approximately 15 NmQuantity: 2

4.

Electronic Steering Column Lock Control Module - J764 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels,Steering; Rep. Gr.48 [Steering Column; Electronic Steering ColumnLock Control ModuleJ764, Removing and Installing]

5.

Start System Button - E378 - Inside the center console storage compartmentRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Start System Button- E378 - , Removing and Installing" .

6.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

60 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 186: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

RemovingDisconnect the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting" .

Remove the lower steering column trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.68 [Storage Compartments and Covers; LowerSteering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing] .

The Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil - D2 - is integrated in the lock cylinder and cannot be replaced separately. If the Anti-TheftImmobilizer Reader Coil - D2 - is faulty, the complete lock cylinder must be replaced.To improve clarity, the ignition key is not shown in the following illustrations.The hole can be located opposite 180° as shown in the illustration. This does not affect removing and installing.

Insert the ignition key into the lock cylinder and turn the key to the “Run” position.

Lock Cylinder Key Positions

“Off” Position1. “Run” Position2. “Start” Position3.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

61 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 187: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Insert steel wire (1.2 mm diameter) into hole in direction of » -arrow- nextto the ignition key.

Release the lever » -3- on the lock cylinder » -1- with a steel wire » -2- »-arrow- .

Remove the lock cylinder » -1- from the steering lock housing.

Disconnect the connector » -arrow- from the Anti-Theft ImmobilizerReader Coil - D2 - .

Risk of steering lock seizing.

Steering lock must not be operated without a lock cylinder.

A blocked steering lock must be replaced.

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

62 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 188: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

With the vehicle-specific lock number, a new lock cylinder is ordered through the distributor or importer using the VIN.

InstallingInsert the ignition key into the lock cylinder » -1- and turn the key to the“Run” position.

Unlock the lever » -3- with steel wire » -2- » -arrow- .

Insert the lock cylinder » -1- into the steering lock housing.

The Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reading Coil - D2 - connection must be insertedinto the guide on the steering lock housing.

Remove the steel wire » -2- from the lock cylinder » -1- and then makesure the lock cylinder fit securely in the steering lock housing.

Connect the connector to the Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil - D2 - .

Connect the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Disconnecting andConnecting" .

Install in reverse order of removal.

RemovingDisconnect the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting" .

Remove the lower steering column trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.68 [Storage Compartments and Covers; LowerSteering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing] .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

63 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 189: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release the catch on both sides using a screwdriver in the direction of the» -arrow A- .

At the same time pull the Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid - N376 - »-1- in the direction of the » -arrow B- from its mount on the steering lockhousing » -3- .

The connector » -2- will be separated at the same time.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Perform a function test.

RemovingDisconnect the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting" .

Remove the lower steering column trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.68 [Storage Compartments and Covers; LowerSteering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing] .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

64 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 190: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release and disconnect the connector » -1- .

Release the clips » -2 and 3- by inserting a suitable screwdriver in theopenings » -arrows- in the steering lock housing » -4- .

If the procedure is not possible because there is not enough space, create atool from two wire hooks as follows.

Bend the one end of a welding wire to form a 1 mm eye.

Cut the welding wire down to the length » -a- .

Dimension » -a- = approximately 50 mm

File the end of the wire hook into a point.

Dimension » -b- = 5 mm

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

65 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 191: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the Ignition/Starter Switch - D - » -5- from the steering lockhousing. The jeweler's screwdriver or wire hooks must remain inserted.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Insert the Ignition/Starter Switch - D - into the steering lock housing until it audibly engages.

Perform a function test.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -

RemovingPosition the steering wheel as far back as possible. Use the entire adjustment range of the steering column adjustment for this.

Remove the steering wheel. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr.48 [Steering Wheel; Steering Wheel, Removingand Installing] .

Remove the lower steering column trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.68 [Storage Compartments and Covers; Lower

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

66 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 192: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing] .

Risk of destroying electronic components with static discharge.

Before disconnecting the connector, discharge static electricity from the body by touching a grounded vehicle component suchas the door striker.

Remove the connector lock in the direction of the arrow » -A- and pressdown.

Disconnect the connector » -1- .

Remove the connector lock in the direction of the arrow » -B- and pressdown.

Disconnect the connector » -2- .

Release the left connector » -2- from the steering column switch module» -1- and disconnect.

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

67 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 193: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release the right connector » -2- from the steering column switch module» -1- and disconnect.

Remove the bolt » -2- from the base carrier » -3- .

Do not twist the Airbag Spiral Spring/Return Spring with Slip Ring - F138 - onthe Steering Column Electronics Control Module - J527 - out of its centerposition when removing it. The front wheels must be in the “straight-aheadposition”.

Remove the steering column switch module » -1- in the direction of the »-arrow- from the base carrier.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

The following must be checked on the Steering Column ElectronicsControl Module - J527 - » -3- before sliding on the steering column switchmodule:

The “arrows” » -1- must align.

The spiral spring » -2- must be seen in the window between the“arrows” » -4- .

Tightening Specifications

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

68 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 194: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Steering Column Switch Module"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -The Airbag Spiral Spring/Return Spring with Slip Ring - F138 - is integrated into the Steering Column Electronics Control Module- J527 - .If the control module is being replaced, select the Replacing function for the respective control module in Guided Fault Findingusing the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

RemovingPosition the steering wheel as far back as possible. Use the entire adjustment range of the steering column adjustment for this.

Remove the steering wheel. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr.48 [Steering Wheel; Steering Wheel, Removingand Installing] .

Remove the lower steering column trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.68 [Storage Compartments and Covers; LowerSteering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing] .

Risk of destroying electronic components with static discharge.

Before disconnecting the connector, discharge static electricity from the body by touching a grounded vehicle component suchas the door striker.

WARNING

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

69 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 195: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release and disconnect the connectors » -3 and 4- .

Do not twist the Airbag Spiral Spring/Return Spring with Slip Ring - F138 - onthe Steering Column Electronics Control Module - J527 - out of its centerposition when removing it. The front wheels must be in the “straight-aheadposition”.

Remove the screws » -arrows- and remove the Steering ColumnElectronics Control Module - J527 - from the steering column switch.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

The return lever on the Turn Signal Switch - E2 - could break off when installing the Steering Column Electronics ControlModule - J527 - .

The Turn Signal Switch - J527 - must be in the 0 position when installing the Steering Column Electronics Control Module - E2 -.

Before sliding the Steering Column Electronics Control Module - J527 - »-3- the following must be checked.

The “arrows” » -1- must align.

The spiral spring » -2- must be seen in the window between the“arrows” » -4- .

Make sure that all connectors are installed securely.

Tightening Specifications

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

70 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 196: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Steering Column Switch Module"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -

7/16 Inch Extractor - T10424US -

This procedure contains mandatory replaceable parts. Refer to component overview prior to starting procedure.

Mandatory Replacement PartsShear bolts - Steering lock housing

Depending on vehicle equipment, the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595 - consists of the following components andcannot be disassembled:

Turn Signal Switch - E2 -

Windshield Wiper Switch - E -

Cruise Control Switch - E45 -

RemovingRemove the Steering Column Electronics Control Module - J527 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Steering Column Electronics ControlModule - J527 - , Removing and Installing" .

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

71 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 197: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release the left connector » -2- from the steering column switch module» -1- and disconnect.

Release the right connector » -2- from the steering column switch module» -1- and disconnect.

Remove the bolt » -2- from the base carrier » -3- .

On a New Steering Column Combination Switch:

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

72 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 198: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Because a new steering column combination switch is always delivered with a base carrier as a complete replacement part, thebase carrier must also be removed.

The shear bolts » -1- of the steering lock housing » -3- must be removed inorder to remove the steering column switch mount base carrier » -2- . Newshear bolts will be needed for installation later. Refer to the Parts Catalog.

Remove the shear bolt » -1- using the - T10424US - .

If the shear bolts cannot be removed using the - T10424US - , use an angleddrill and an 8.5 mm diameter bit to drill it out.

Remove the steering lock housing » -3- and the steering column switchbase carrier » -2- toward the rear from the steering column.

Remove the steering lock housing from the steering column combinationswitch base carrier.

Installing

When Reusing the Steering Column Combination Switch:Slide the steering column combination switch into the guide on the base carrier.

Install and tighten the bolt.

On a New Steering Column Combination Switch:

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

73 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 199: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Install the steering lock housing » -3- in the base carrier » -2- .

Slide the pre-assembled unit from the steering lock housing, base carrierand the steering column combination switch all the way onto the steeringcolumn and line them up with the threaded holes.

Attach the steering lock housing » -3- to the steering column with newshear bolts » -1- .

Tighten the new shear bolts » -1- until the bolt heads shear off.

Continuation for New and Reused Steering Column Combination Switch:Install in reverse order of removal.

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Steering Column Switch Module"

Turn Signal Switch - E2 - , Cruise Control Switch - E45 - and the Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch - E22 - togethermake up the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595 - .The switch cannot be separated. If an individual switch is faulty the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595 - must bereplaced.

Turn Signal Switch - E2 - , Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Turn Signal Switch - E2 - , Removing and Installing" .

Turn Signal Switch - E2 - , Cruise Control Switch - E45 - and the Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch - E22 - togethermake up the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595 - .The switch cannot be separated. If an individual switch is faulty the Steering Column Combination Switch - E595 - must bereplaced.

Turn Signal Switch - E2 - , Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Turn Signal Switch - E2 - , Removing and Installing" .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

74 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 200: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Steering Column Combination Switch Base Carrier, Removing and Installing, Vehicle with Mechanical Ignition Lock"

⇒ Chapter "Steering Column Combination Switch Base Carrier, Removing and Installing, Vehicles with Electronic Ignition Lock"

Steering Column Combination Switch Base Carrier, Removing and Installing, Vehicle with Mechanical Ignition Lock

The base carrier with the steering column combination switch is removed and installed together with the steering lock housing.

Removing and installing the steering lock housing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Steering Lock Housing, Removing and Installing" .

Steering Column Combination Switch Base Carrier, Removing and Installing, Vehicles with Electronic Ignition Lock

The base carrier for the steering column combination switch is remove and installed with the Electronic Steering Column LockControl Module - J764 - .

Removing and installing the Electronic Steering Column Lock Control Module - J764 - . Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels,Steering; Rep. Gr.48 [Steering Column; Electronic Steering Column Lock Control ModuleJ764, Removing and Installing] .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

7/16 Inch Extractor - T10424US -

NOTE

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

75 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 201: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

This procedure contains mandatory replaceable parts. Refer to component overview prior to starting procedure.

Mandatory Replacement PartsShear bolts - Steering lock housing

The shear bolts » -1- of the steering lock housing must be removed in order toremove the steering column switch mount base carrier » -2- . New shear boltswill be needed for installation later. Refer to the Parts Catalog.

RemovingRemove the steering column combination switch. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Turn Signal Switch - E2 - , Removing and Installing" .

Remove the shear bolt » -1- using the - T10424US - .

If the shear bolts cannot be removed using the - T10424US - , use an angleddrill and an 8.5 mm diameter bit to drill it out.

Remove the steering lock housing » -3- and the steering column switchbase carrier » -2- toward the rear from the steering column.

Remove the steering lock housing from the steering column combinationswitch base carrier.

Installing

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

76 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 202: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Install the steering lock housing » -3- in the base carrier » -2- .

When Reusing the Steering Column Combination Switch:Slide the steering column combination switch into the guide on the base carrier.

Install and tighten the bolt.

Continuation for New and Reused Steering Column Combination Switch:Slide the pre-assembled unit from the steering lock housing, base carrier and the steering column combination switch all theway onto the steering column and line them up with the threaded holes.

Attach the steering lock housing » -3- to the steering column with newshear bolts » -1- .

Tighten the new shear bolts » -1- until the bolt heads shear off.

Install in reverse order of removal.

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Steering Column Switch Module"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

77 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 203: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Parking Aid"

⇒ Chapter "Parking Aid Control Module - J446 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H15 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Rear Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Parking Aid Sensor, Replacing"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

78 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 204: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Parking Aid Sensor in Rear Bumper CoverLeft Rear Parking Aid Sensor - G203 - Left Rear Center Parking Aid Sensor - G204 - Right Rear Center Parking Aid Sensor - G205 - Right Rear Parking Aid Sensor - G206 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Rear Parking AidSensor, Removing and Installing" .Replacing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Parking Aid Sensor, Replacing" .

1.

Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H15 - Removing and Installing, Coupe. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Rear ParkingAid Warning Buzzer - H15 - , Removing and Installing, Coupe" .Removing and Installing, Cabriolet. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Rear ParkingAid Warning Buzzer - H15 - , Removing and Installing, Convertible" .

2.

Parking Aid Button - E266 - Inside the center console in front of the selector mechanismRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Parking Aid Button- E266 - , Removing and Installing" .

3.

Parking Aid Control Module - J446 - Via the relay panel underneath the driver side instrument panelRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Parking Aid ControlModule - J446 - , Removing and Installing" .

4.

Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22 - On the relay panel under the driver side instrument panelRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Front Parking AidWarning Buzzer - H22 - , Removing and Installing" .

5.

Parking Aid Sensor Inside The Front Bumper CoverLeft Front Parking Aid Sensor - G255 - Left Front Center Parking Aid Sensor - G254 - Right Front Center Parking Aid Sensor - G253 -

6.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

79 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 205: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The Parking Aid Control Module - J446 - is located behind the instrument panel on the driver side above the relay panel.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the instrument panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.70 [Instrument Panel; Instrument Panel, Removing andInstalling] .

Remove the expanding rivets » -2- on the Parking Aid Control Module- J446 - » -1- .

Remove the Parking Aid Control Module - J446 - » -1- from the bracket.

Release and disconnect the connectors.

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

The Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22 - is located under the driver side instrument panel and is secure to the relay panelbracket.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the driver side instrument panel cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.68 [Storage Compartments and Covers;Driver Side Instrument Panel Cover, Removing and Installing] .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

80 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 206: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Loosen the expanding rivets » -arrows- .

Release and disconnect the connector » -2- and remove the FrontParking Aid Warning Buzzer - H22 - » -1- from the bracket » -3- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

⇒ Chapter "Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H15 - , Removing and Installing, Coupe"

⇒ Chapter "Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H15 - , Removing and Installing, Convertible"

Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H15 - , Removing and Installing, CoupeThe Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H1 - is attached on the plate behind the right luggage compartment side trim panel. It isaccessible from the luggage compartment.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the right side trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.70 [Vehicle Interior Trim Panels; Side Trim Panel, Removingand Installing] .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

81 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 207: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Loosen the retainer » -arrow- and remove Rear Parking Aid WarningBuzzer - H15 - » -1- from bracket.

Release and disconnect the connector.

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H15 - , Removing and Installing, ConvertibleThe Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer - H1 - is attached on the rear bass speaker behind the side trim panel.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the right side trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.70 [Vehicle Interior Trim Panels; Side Trim Panel, Removingand Installing] .

Loosen the retainer » -2- and remove Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer- H15 - » -1- from bracket.

Release and disconnect the connector.

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

82 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 208: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Removal and installation is the same for all sensors so the following information describes only one of them.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.63 [Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing andInstalling] .

Always follow the sequence for removing the sensor.Otherwise, the sensor may be damaged. Hairline cracks which lead to sensor failure can develop if too much force is used onthe sensor.Remove the sensor from the bracket first and then disconnect the connector from the sensor.

Push the locking mechanisms » -arrows- on the sensor mount » -1-toward the outside.

Pull the sensor » -2- backward out of the sensor bracket with the wiresconnected.

When removing the sensor, make sure that the decoupling ring (black siliconering) remains on the sensor head and does not remain in the bracket or getlost.Do not bend the decoupling ring.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

83 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 209: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Disconnect the connector » -2- and remove the sensor » -1- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Do not bend the decoupling ring.An incorrect or damaged decoupling ring can lead to malfunctions.Replace any damaged decoupling rings and be sure install the correct decoupling ring.

Since the lengths of the front parking aid sensor heads are different, the height decoupling rings installed are also different.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

84 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 210: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Make sure the correct decoupling ring is installed on the sensor head.

Type of Sensor Height of DecouplingRing » -B-

Front Parking AidSensors

5.7 mm

Replace the sensor decoupling ring » -1- .

Install the sensor in the correct location in the bumper cover.

Sensor brackets are designed in different shapes and must be matched to therespective component location in the bumper cover.Be sure to align the electric connection on the sensor when installing it.

Parking Aid Sensors Allocation Inside the Front Bumper Cover:

LF - Outer Left1. FLC - Front Left Center2. FRC - Front Right Center3. RF - Outer Right4.

Make sure that the sensors » -1 2, 3 and 4- are matched up with theconnectors.When removing the sensor, make sure that the decoupling ring (black siliconering) remains on the sensor head and does not remain in the bracket or getlost.Both retaining clips on the sensor mount must engage audibly when installingthe sensor.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

85 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 211: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Make sure the sensor is seated correctly in the bracket after installation.

Dimension » -a- for the circular gap between the sensor head and bumpercover must be visibly even all around on the outer side of the bumper cover.

Removal and installation is the same for all sensors so the following information describes only one of them.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the rear bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.63 [Rear Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and Installing] .

Always follow the sequence for removing the sensor.Otherwise, the sensor may be damaged. Hairline cracks which lead to sensor failure can develop if too much force is used onthe sensor.Remove the sensor from the bracket first and then disconnect the connector from the sensor.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

86 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 212: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Press the locking mechanisms » -arrows- on the sensor holder » -1-outward and pull the sensor » -2- out of the sensor bracket toward therear with the wires still connected.

When removing the sensor, make sure that the decoupling ring (black siliconering) remains on the sensor head and does not remain in the bracket or getlost.Do not bend the decoupling ring.

Disconnect the connector » -2- and remove the sensor » -1- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Do not bend the decoupling ring.Using a damaged decoupling ring can cause malfunctions.Replace any damaged decoupling rings.

Sensor brackets are designed in different shapes and must be matched to the respective component location in the bumper cover.Be sure to align the electric connection on the sensor when installing it.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

87 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 213: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Parking Aid Sensor Allocation Inside the Rear Bumper Cover:

OR - Outer Right1. RRC - Rear Right Center2. LRC - Left Rear Center3. LR - Outer Rear4.

When removing the sensor, make sure that the decoupling ring (black siliconering) remains on the sensor head and does not remain in the bracket or getlost.Both retainers on the sensor must engage audibly in the sensor mount wheninstalling.

Make sure that the sensor is seated correctly in the bracket afterinstallation.

Dimension » -a- for the circular gap between the sensor head and sensormount must be even all around on the outer side of the bumper cover.

If a new parking aid sensor is installed, the sensor head must first be painted to match the color of the bumper cover. The followingrequirements must be observed when painting the sensors to ensure the parking aid system will not be impaired.

Sensor, PaintingRemove the decoupling ring (black silicone ring) from the new sensor head.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

88 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 214: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Use isopropyl alcohol to remove the grease from the black sensor head »-1- in the area to be painted » -2- .

Paint the sensor in the area to be painted » -2- the same color as thebumper cover.

Paint application dimension » -B- is 3 mm (+ maximum 2 mm).When the paint has dried, reinstall the decoupling ring (black silicone ring)on the sensor head.

Do not bend the decoupling ring.Using a damaged decoupling ring can cause malfunctions.Replace any damaged decoupling rings.

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Blind Spot Detection"

⇒ Chapter "Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Left/Right Exterior Mirror - K303 - / - K304 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Blind Spot Detection Control Module/Module 2 - J1086 - / - J1087 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Blind Spot Detection, Calibrating"

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

89 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 215: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Left Exterior Mirror - K303 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Blind Spot DetectionWarning Lamp in Left/Right Exterior Mirror - K303 - / - K304 - ,Removing and Installing" .

1.

Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Right Exterior Mirror - K304 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Blind Spot DetectionWarning Lamp in Left/Right Exterior Mirror - K303 - / - K304 - ,Removing and Installing" .

2.

Blind Spot Detection Control Module - J1086 - MasterRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Blind Spot DetectionControl Module/Module 2 - J1086 - / - J1087 - , Removing andInstalling" .Calibrating. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Blind Spot Detection, Calibrating" .

3.

Connector4. Bracket5. Bolt

2 NmQuantity: 2

6.

Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 - J1087 - SlaveRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Blind Spot DetectionControl Module/Module 2 - J1086 - / - J1087 - , Removing andInstalling" .Calibrating. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Blind Spot Detection, Calibrating" .

7.

Bolt2 NmQuantity: 2

8.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

90 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 216: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Left Exterior Mirror - K303 - /Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Right ExteriorMirror - K304 - is located in the mirror glass and cannot be replaced separately.

Removing and installing the mirror glass. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.66 [Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror Glass,Removing and Installing] .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -

RemovingDisconnect the connector » -4- .

Remove the upper bolt » -2- .

Remove the Blind Spot Detection Control Module - J1086 - /Blind SpotDetection Control Module 2 - J1087 - from the bracket » -3- .

Remove the Bracket:

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

91 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 217: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the lower bolt » -2- .

Remove the bracket » -3- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:The blind spot detection calibration normally occurs automatically.Static calibration is only required when there is a DTC memory entry.

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Blind Spot Detection"

⇒ Chapter "Preparing for Calibration"

⇒ Chapter "Calibration Preparation Work"

⇒ Chapter "Calibration, Performing"

Preparing for Calibration

ConditionsThe blind spot detection must be calibrated for the following conditions:

Corresponding DTC stored in the DTC memory for the Blind Spot Detection Control Module - J1086 - / Blind Spot DetectionControl Module 2 - J1087 - . Use the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

92 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 218: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Volkswagen LogoThe Calibration Laser - VAS6350/3A - is aligned to the center of theVolkswagen logo.

1.

Calibration Tool - Wheel Center Mountings - VAS6350/1 - With wheel bolt adapter SW 17 and measuring paddle

2.

Catch BracketCalibration Tool - Spacing Laser - VAS6350/2 - mount for the distancemeasurement.Distance to the Calibration Tool - Wheel Center Mountings- VAS6350/1 - on the rear wheels: dimension » -a- = 1700 ± 2 mm

3.

LevelOn the calibration boardFor checking the horizontal position

4.

Calibration Tool - Spacing Laser - VAS6350/2 -For distance measurementUsage information. Refer to the Operating Instructions.

5.

Plastic FootThree on underside of the calibration boardAdjustable for aligning horizontal position of the calibration board

6.

Calibration Tool - Linear Laser - VAS6350/3 - With “laser protective eyewear”On the calibration boardTurning on and off. Refer to the Operating Instructions.

7.

Measuring ScaleFor positioning the Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool- VAS6350/4 -Dimension to be adjusted measuring point on steel ruler = 865 mm

8.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

93 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 219: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Calibration Preparation WorkSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Calibration Unit - VAS6350A -

Calibration Tool - Wheel Center Mountings - VAS6350/1 -

Calibration Tool - Spacing Laser - VAS6350/2 -

Calibration Tool - Linear Laser - VAS6350/3A -

Vehicle Diagnostic Tester

RequirementsMove the vehicle onto a secure flat surface.

Apply the parking brake - the vehicle must not move during the measurement.

Place the front wheels in a straight-ahead position, steering wheel in 0 position.

No persons may be in the vehicle interior during the measurement.

Do not open and close the vehicle doors during calibration.

ProcedureConnect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

Turn on the ignition.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

94 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 220: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Secure three suitable wheel bolt adapters for the wheel bolts on each- VAS6350/1 - .

Place the measuring paddle on both - VAS6350/1 - and secure them usinga clamping screw.

Place the - VAS6350/1 - onto the wheel bolts on both rear wheels.

- VAS6350/1 - must be in wheel rotation center.

Attach the - VAS6350/1 - onto the wheels so that any installed “anti-theftwheel bolts” are not connected to the - VAS6350/1 - .

Adjust the measuring paddle with aid of lock bolts so that they move freelyjust above the floor. Check the paddles for ease of movement.

The measuring paddles must move easily.

The measuring paddles must be vertical.

Position the - VAS6350A - at distance » -a- to the rear wheels.

Dimension » -a- = 1700 ± 2 mm

Switch on the - VAS6350/2 - .

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

95 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 221: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The Following Display Appears:

The display shows how to stop the - VAS6350/2 - . Press the correspondingbutton.

Attach with Front Edge1. Attach with Rear Edge2.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

96 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 222: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Hold the - VAS6350/2 - » -2- flush in the bracket on one side of thecalibration board (attach with rear edge). The - VAS6350/2 - » -2- must sitsecurely on the bracket.

Press the measuring button briefly.

The laser switches on.Make sure that laser beam from - VAS6350/2 - » -2- hits lower, enlargedpart of the measuring paddle » -1- .

If this is not the case, correct the measuring paddles accordingly via clampingscrews on the - VAS6350/1 - .

Use one hand to secure the - VAS6350/2 - in the bracket on the- VAS6350 - while the laser beam is visible on the paddle.

Then press the measurement button for the distance measurement briefly.

Write down the value.

“1,700 m” (specified value: 1700 ± 2 mm).

Repeat this measurement on the other side of the - VAS6350 - in the sameway for the rear wheel.

The distance value must be the same on both sides.If values are not identical:

Align the - VAS6350A - long enough so that both sides are identical.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

97 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 223: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Secure the - VAS6350/4 - for the lane change assistance to the- VAS6350 - mount.

When installed correctly, vehicle electrical system voltage line must beconnected at bottom left of - VAS6350 - (as seen in direction of travel).

Dimension » -a- = 543 mm (measured from upper edge of - VAS6350 - toworkshop floor).

The adjustment dimension is set with the measuring point » -arrow- onthe base of the - VAS6350 - on the scale of the steel ruler » -1- .

Left setting = 865 mm (read on measurement scale » -1- ).

Connect the calibration unit for - VAS6350/4 - for the lane changeassistance to the vehicle electrical system voltage.

Bring the - VAS6350A - into a horizontal position.

To do so, twist plastic feet under calibration device so that air bubble inlevel is located exactly in the center of the indicator » -arrow- .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

98 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 224: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Wear “laser protective eyewear”.

Turn on the - VAS6350/3A - on the - VAS6350A - .

Align the entire - VAS6350A - so that the laser beam shines on the centerof the vehicle rear above the VW logo.

Check right and left distance between catch bracket on the - VAS6350A -and measuring paddle » -1- on wheel mountings again.

Specified value: 1700 ± 2 mm

Calibrate the Blind Spot Detection Control Module - J1086 - /Blind SpotDetection Control Module 2 - J1087 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Calibration,Performing" .

Calibration, PerformingSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Calibration Tool - VAS6350 -

Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool - VAS6350/4 -The following should not occur during the calibration procedure:

Vehicle doors must not be opened or closed.

People must not sit in the vehicle.

People must not go between the vehicle and the - VAS6350/4 - for the lane change assistance.

Procedure

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

99 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 225: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Perform the preparation work. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Calibration Preparation Work" .

Turn on the - VAS6350/4 - for the lane change assistance on the voltageswitch » -3- .

The green LED » -1- must turn on.

The red LED » -2- illuminates: check the - VAS6350/4 - for the lanechange assistance.

Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

Select calibration in the “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

Follow the instructions in the display Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

During the course of the program, a request is made to switch the- VAS6350/4 - for the lane change assistance from the left to the right side ofthe - VAS6350 - .

Switch of the - VAS6350/4 - for the lane change assistance and removethe - VAS6350 - .

When installed correctly, vehicle electrical system voltage line must beconnected at bottom left of - VAS6350/4 - for the lane change assistance(as seen in direction of travel).

Dimension » -a- = 543 mm (measured from upper edge of - VAS6350 - tothe floor).

Right setting = 865 mm (read on measurement scale » -1- ).

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

100 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 226: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Turn on the - VAS6350/4 - for the lane change assistance on the voltageswitch » -3- .

The green LED » -1- must turn on.

Follow the instructions in the display. Refer to Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Trim Release Lever - T10039 -

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

101 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 227: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

7/16 Inch Extractor - T10424US -

Hot Air Blower - VAG1416 -

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

102 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 228: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Adhesive Strip Remover - VAS6349 -

Calibration Unit - VAS6350A -

Calibration Tool - Wheel Center Mountings - VAS6350/1 -

Calibration Tool - Spacing Laser - VAS6350/2 -

Calibration Tool - Linear Laser - VAS6350/3A -

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

103 of 103 1/30/2019 10:59 AM

Page 229: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Component Location Overview - Luggage Compartment Lamps"

⇒ Chapter "Component Location Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps"

⇒ Chapter "Left/Right Footwell Lamp - W9 - / - W10 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Left/Right Front Footwell Illumination Bulb - L151 - / - L152 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Central Locking -Safe- Indicator Lamp - K133 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp - W20 - / - W14 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Front Interior Lamp - W1 - /Front Passenger Reading Lamp - W13 - /Driver Reading Lamp - W19 - ,Replacing"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

1 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 230: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Luggage CompartmentLamp - W3 - , Removing and Installing" .

1.

Front Interior Lamp - W1 - Bolt tightening specification: 2 NmRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Front InteriorLamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing" .

1.

Illuminated Vanity MirrorFront Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp - W14 - Driver Vanity Mirror Lamp - W20 - Removing and installing and replacing bulbs. Refer to ⇒ Chapter"Driver/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp - W20 - / - W14 - ,Removing and Installing" .

2.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

2 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 231: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Trim Removal Wedge - 3409 -

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Pry the Left Footwell Lamp - W9 - » -1- out of the trim panel under theinstrument panel using Trim Removal Wedge - 3409 - .

CAUTION

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

3 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 232: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release and disconnect the connector » -arrow- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

RemovingRemove the front footwell lamp. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Left/Right Footwell Lamp - W9 - / - W10 - , Removing and Installing" .

Pry up the heat shield » -2- on both sides » -A arrows- .

Remove the heat shield » -2- from the Glove Compartment Lamp - W6 -» -1- .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

4 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 233: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the bulb » -1- from the bulb socket » -2- on the back of the glovecompartment lamp.

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

There is a risk of damaging the bulb.

Do not touch bulb glass of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the bulb glass which, when the bulb isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.

Perform a function test.

The Central Locking -Safe- Indicator Lamp - K133 - is installed near the exterior rearview mirror in the driver door trim panel.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the driver front door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.70 [Front Door Trim Panels; Front Door Trim Panel,Removing and Installing] .

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

5 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 234: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release and disconnect the connector.

Release the retaining tab on the Central Locking -Safe- Indicator Lamp- K133 - » -2- by pressing » -arrows- .

Remove the Central Locking -Safe- Indicator Lamp - K133 - » -2- fromthe mount » -1- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Perform a function test.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Trim Removal Wedge - 3409 -The Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3 - is located in the side storage compartment/side trim panel.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

6 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 235: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Pry out the Luggage Compartment Lamp - W3 - » -1- with the - 3409 -from the side storage compartment/side trim panel » -arrows- .

Release and disconnect the connector » -arrow- .

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

7 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 236: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Push the contact plate » -1- for the lamp in the direction of » -arrow- .

Remove the tubular bulb » -2- out of the bulb socket.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

There is a risk of damaging the bulb.

Do not touch bulb glass of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the bulb glass which, when the bulb isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.

Insert the luggage compartment lamp into the opening and engage on the opposite side.

Perform a function test.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Trim Removal Wedge - 3409 -

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

8 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 237: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The removal and installation is described for the left side. Removing and installing on the right side is identical.

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Carefully pry the Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp - W14 - » -1- fromthe roof trim panel using the - 3409 - .

NOTE

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

9 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 238: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release and disconnect the connector » -arrow- .

Push the contact plate » -1- for the lamp in the direction of the » -arrow- .

Remove the tubular bulb » -2- out of the bulb socket.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

There is a risk of damaging the bulb.

Do not touch bulb glass of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the bulb glass which, when the bulb isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.

Insert the vanity mirror lighting into the opening and engage it on the opposite side.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

10 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 239: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Perform a function test.

The Left Center Reading Light - W39 - /Right Center Reading Light - W40 - are removed and installed the same way so theprocedure is only described for one of them.The Front Interior Lamp - W1 - must be completely replaced if one of the LEDs is faulty

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Removing the Front Interior Lamp - W1 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing" .

Turn the bulb holder » -arrows- from the faulty interior lamp 90° to the leftand remove.

Carefully pull the bulb out of the socket.

Installing

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

11 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 240: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Install in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

There is a risk of damaging the bulb.

Do not touch bulb glass of bulb with bare fingers. Fingers will leave traces of grease on the bulb glass which, when the bulb isswitched on, will evaporate and cloud the bulb glass.Use clean gloves for example to insert the bulbs.

Perform a function test.

⇒ Chapter "Component Location Overview - Instrument Panel Controls"

⇒ Chapter "Component Location Overview - Controls in Front Doors"

⇒ Chapter "Component Location Overview - Controls in Center Console"

⇒ Chapter "Component Location Overview - Controls in Roof Trim Panel"

⇒ Chapter "Rotary Light Switch - EX1 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Instrument Panel and Switch Illumination Dimmer Switch - E20 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Headlamp Range Control Adjuster - E102 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Start/Stop Mode Button - E693 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Parking Aid Button - E266 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Front Passenger Airbag -Disabled- Indicator Lamp - K145 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Emergency Flasher Button - E229 - , Removing and Installing"

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

12 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 241: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjusting Unit - EX11 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Power Window Control Head in Driver Door - E512 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Front Passenger Door Window Regulator Switch - E107 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Driver Interior Locking Button - E308 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Front Passenger Interior Locking Button - E309 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Rear Lid Remote Release Button - E233 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Tire Pressure Monitoring Display Button - E492 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Driver/Front Passenger Door Contact Switch - F2 - / - F3 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Start System Button - E378 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Sunroof Tilt Button 1 - E582 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Garage Door Opener Control Head - E284 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Interior Monitoring Deactivation Switch - E267 - , Removing and Installing"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

13 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 242: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Tire Pressure Monitoring Display Button - E492 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Tire PressureMonitoring Display Button - E492 - , Removing and Installing" .

1.

Front Passenger Airbag Deactivation Key Switch - E224 - Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.69 [FrontPassenger Airbag; Front Passenger Airbag Deactivation Key Switch,Removing and Installing] .

2.

Rotary Light Switch - EX1 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Rotary Light Switch- EX1 - , Removing and Installing" .

3.

Instrument Panel and Switch Illumination Dimmer Switch - E20 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Instrument Panel andSwitch Illumination Dimmer Switch - E20 - , Removing andInstalling" .

- Headlamp Range Control Adjuster - E102 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Headlamp RangeControl Adjuster - E102 - , Removing and Installing" .

4.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

14 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 243: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Front Passenger Interior Locking Button - E309 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Front PassengerInterior Locking Button - E309 - , Removing and Installing" .

1.

Front Passenger Door Window Regulator Switch - E107 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Front Passenger DoorWindow Regulator Switch - E107 - , Removing and Installing" .

2.

Mirror Adjusting Switch - E43 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Exterior RearviewMirror Adjusting Unit - EX11 - , Removing and Installing" .

3.

Driver Interior Locking Button - E308 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Driver Interior LockingButton - E308 - , Removing and Installing" .

4.

Left Front Window Regulator Switch - E40 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Power Window ControlHead in Driver Door - E512 - , Removing and Installing" .

5.

Right Front Power Window Switch in Driver Door - E81 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Power Window ControlHead in Driver Door - E512 - , Removing and Installing" .

6.

Rear Lid Remote Release Button - E233 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Rear Lid RemoteRelease Button - E233 - , Removing and Installing" .

7.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

15 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 244: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Start System Button - E378 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Start System Button- E378 - , Removing and Installing" .

1.

Start/Stop Mode Button - E693 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Start/Stop Mode Button- E693 - , Removing and Installing" .

2.

Parking Aid Button - E266 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Parking Aid Button- E266 - , Removing and Installing" .

3.

Emergency Flasher Button - E229 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Emergency FlasherButton - E229 - , Removing and Installing" .

4.

Sunroof Tilt Button 1 - E582 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Sunroof Tilt Button 1- E582 - , Removing and Installing" .

1.

Front Interior Lamp - W1 - Screws: 2 NmRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Front InteriorLamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing" .

2.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

16 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 245: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Rotary Light Switch - EX1 - consists of:Light Switch - E1 -

Fog Lamp Switch - E7 -

Rear Fog Lamp Switch - E18 -

Headlamp Switch Illumination Bulb - L9 -

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Turn the Light Switch - E1 - to “0”.

Push the Light Switch - E1 - handle in » -arrow 1- and turn it a little to theright in direction of » -arrow 2- .

Hold the rotary handle in this position and remove the Light Switch - E1 - from the instrument panel by the handle » -arrow 3- .

Release and disconnect the connector.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Connect the connector.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

17 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 246: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Hold Light Switch - E1 - firmly and press in rotary handle of Light Switch- E1 - in direction of » -arrow 1- and turn slightly toward right in directionof » -arrow 2- .

Hold the rotary handle in this position and insert the Light Switch - E1 - into the instrument panel in direction of » -arrow 3- .

Turn the rotary switch to the “0” position, release it and engage the LightSwitch - E1 - .

The Instrument Panel and Switch Illumination Dimmer Switch - E20 - and the Headlamp Range Control Adjuster - E102 - areone component and cannot be replaced separately.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the left driver side instrument panel cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.68 [Storage Compartments and Covers;Driver Side Instrument Panel Cover, Removing and Installing] .

Release and disconnect the connectors.

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

18 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 247: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Open the tabs » -arrows- and remove the Instrument Panel and SwitchIllumination Dimmer Switch - E20 - » -1- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

The Headlamp Range Control Adjuster - E102 - and the Instrument Panel and Switch Illumination Dimmer Switch - E20 - areone component and cannot be replaced separately.

Removing and installing the Instrument Panel and Switch Illumination Dimmer Switch - E20 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "InstrumentPanel and Switch Illumination Dimmer Switch - E20 - , Removing and Installing" .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Trim Removal Wedge - 3409 -

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

19 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 248: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the climate control trim » -2- using the - 3409 - .

Release and disconnect the connectors.

Release the tabs » -arrows- and remove the Start/Stop Mode Button- E693 - » -1- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Trim Removal Wedge - 3409 -

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

20 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 249: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the climate control trim » -2- using the - 3409 - .

Release and disconnect the connectors.

Release the tabs » -arrows- and remove the Parking Aid Button - E266 -» -1- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Trim Removal Wedge - 3409 -

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

21 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 250: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the climate control trim » -2- using the - 3409 - .

Release and disconnect the connectors.

Press the locking mechanisms away from each other in direction of »-arrow- and remove the Front Passenger Airbag -Disabled- Indicator Lamp- K145 - » -1- from the trim frame » -2- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Trim Removal Wedge - 3409 -

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

22 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 251: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the climate control trim » -2- using the - 3409 - .

Release and disconnect the connectors.

Release the tabs » -arrows- and remove the Emergency Flasher Button- E229 - » -1- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster - EX11 - components:Mirror Adjusting Switch - E43 -

Mirror Selector Switch - E48 -

Exterior Rearview Mirror Heating Switch - E231 -

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

23 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 252: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Mirror Folding Switch - E263 -

Mirror Adjustment Switch Illumination Bulb - L78 -

The components listed above cannot be replaced separately.If faulty the Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster - EX11 - must be replaced.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.70 [Front Door Trim Panels; Front Door Trim Panel,Removing and Installing] .

Disconnect the connector » -3- .

Release the tabs » -arrows- and remove the Exterior Rearview MirrorAdjuster - EX11 - » -1- from the door trim panel » -2- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

24 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 253: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Trim Removal Wedge - 3409 -

Power Window Control Head in Driver Door - E512 - componentsLeft Front Window Regulator Switch - E40 -

Right Front Power Window Switch in Driver Door - E81 -

Push Button Illumination Bulb - L76 -

The components listed above cannot be replaced separately. Replace the Power Window Control Head in Driver Door - E512 - if itis faulty.

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Beginning on the front side, disconnect the grip panel » -1- from theretaining tabs » -arrows- using the - 3409 - .

Then disconnect the rest of the retaining tabs from the grip panel » -1- allaround using the - 3409 - .

Carefully pivot the grip panel upward in the direction of the » -arrow- outof the door trim.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

25 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 254: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Disconnect the connector » -1 and 2- and remove the handle trim.

Disconnect the retaining tabs » -arrows- and remove the Power WindowControl Head In Driver Door - E512 - » -1- from the grip panel.

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Trim Removal Wedge - 3409 -

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

26 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 255: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The Push Button Illumination Bulb - L76 - is integrated in the Front Passenger Door Window Regulator Switch - E107 - andcannot be replaced separately.

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Beginning on the front side, disconnect the grip panel » -1- from theretaining tabs » -arrows- using the - 3409 - .

Then disconnect the rest of the retaining tabs from the grip panel » -1- allaround using the - 3409 - .

Carefully pivot the grip panel upward in the direction of the » -arrow- outof the door trim.

NOTE

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

27 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 256: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Disconnect the connector » -1- and the handle trim.

Open the tabs » -arrows- and remove the Front Passenger Door WindowRegulator Switch - E107 - » -1- from the handle trim.

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

The Push Button Illumination Bulb - L76 - is integrated in the Driver Interior Locking Button - E308 - and cannot be replacedseparately.

Removing

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

28 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 257: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.70 [Front Door Trim Panels; Front Door Trim Panel,Removing and Installing] .

Release and disconnect the connectors.

Open the tabs » -arrows- and remove the Driver Interior Locking Button- E308 - » -1- from the door trim panel » -2- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

The Push Button Illumination Bulb - L76 - is integrated in the Front Passenger Interior Locking Button - E309 - and cannot bereplaced separately.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.70 [Front Door Trim Panels; Front Door Trim Panel,Removing and Installing] .

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

29 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 258: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release and disconnect the connectors.

Open the tabs » -arrows- and remove the Front Passenger InteriorLocking Button - E309 - » -1- from the door trim panel » -2- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

The Push Button Illumination Bulb - E233 - is integrated in the Rear Lid Remote Release Button - L76 - and cannot bereplaced separately.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.70 [Front Door Trim Panels; Front Door Trim Panel,Removing and Installing] .

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

30 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 259: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release and disconnect the connector.

Open the tabs » -arrows- and remove the Rear Lid Remote ReleaseButton - E233 - » -1- from the door trim panel.

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Display Button - E492 - » -1- is located in theglove compartment.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the glove compartment. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.68 [Storage Compartments and Covers; GloveCompartment, Removing and Installing] .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

31 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 260: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release and disconnect the connector » -arrow- .

Release the tabs » -arrows- and remove the Tire Pressure MonitoringDisplay Button - E492 - .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

The Driver Door Contact Switch - F2 - /Front Passenger Door Contact Switch - F3 - is integrated in the door contact switchand can be replaced separately if faulty.

Removing and installing the front door lock. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.57 [Door Components; Door Lock, Removingand Installing] .

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

32 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 261: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the front center console cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.68 [Center Console; Center Console, Removing andInstalling] .

Release and disconnect the connector » -2- .

Release the tabs and remove the Start System Button - E378 - » -1- fromthe cover.

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Removing the Front Interior Lamp - W1 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing,Coupe" .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

33 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 262: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Release the retaining hooks » -arrows- and remove the Sunroof TiltButton 1 - E582 - » -2- from the Front Interior Lamp - W1 - » -1- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

⇒ Chapter "Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing, Coupe"

⇒ Chapter "Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing, Convertible"

Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing, CoupeSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Trim Removal Wedge - 3409 -

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

Removing

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

34 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 263: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Carefully remove the trim » -2- with the - 3409 - from the Front InteriorLamp - W1 - » -1- » -arrows- .

Remove the bolts » -arrows- from the Front Interior Lamp - W1 - » -1- .

Remove the Front Interior Lamp - W1 - » -1- from the bracket in theheadliner.

Depending on vehicle equipment release and disconnect the connector »-arrows- from the Front Interior Lamp - W1 - » -1- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Component Location Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps"

Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing, ConvertibleSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

35 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 264: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Trim Removal Wedge - 3409 -

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Starting at the back, unclip the trim » -1- from the Front Interior Lamp- W1 - » -2- using the - 3409 - » -arrows- .

Release the retaining tabs » -arrows- .

Fold the Front Interior Lamp - W1 - » -1- downward.

Depending on vehicle equipment release and disconnect the connectorfrom the Front Interior Lamp - W1 - » -1- .

Installing

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

36 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 265: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:Insert the Front Interior Lamp - W1 - into the roof cutout and press until it audibly engages.

Insert the trim in the Front Interior Lamp - W1 - and press on the trim until it clicks into place.

The Front Interior Lamp - W1 - must be completely replaced if one of the LEDs is faulty

Garage Door Opener Control Head - E284 - » -1- is installed in sun visor ondriver side.The sun visor and Garage Door Opener Control Head - E284 - can only bereplaced together.

Removing and installing the driver side sun visor and the Garage DoorOpener Control Head - E284 - . Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.68 [Extra Equipment; Sun Visor, Removing and Installing] .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Trim Removal Wedge - 3409 -The Interior Monitoring Deactivation Switch - E267 - is installed in the left side lower trim.

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

When positioning a prying tool, put commercially available adhesive tape over the component in the visible area.

Removing

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

37 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 266: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Unclip the switch » -1- from the trim panel using the - 3409 - .

Release and disconnect the connector.

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Interior Monitoring"

⇒ Chapter "Alarm Horn - H12 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Anti-Theft Alarm System, Deactivating and Activating"

⇒ Chapter "Interior Monitoring Sensor - G273 - , Removing and Installing"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

38 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 267: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Components of Anti-Theft Alarm System/interior monitoring are dependenton vehicle equipment.

Alarm Horn - H12 - Nut tightening specification: 10 NmIn the center of the plenum chamberRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Alarm Horn - H12 - ,Removing and Installing" .

1.

Front Passenger Door Control Module - J387 - In the front passenger doorRefer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.57 [Central Locking; ComponentLocation Overview - Central Locking] .

2.

Front Passenger Door Contact Switch - F3 - Inside the Front Passenger Central Locking Lock Unit - F221 - Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.57 [Door Components; Overview -Door Components] .

3.

Interior Monitoring Sensor - G273 - In the Front Interior Lamp - W1 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Interior MonitoringSensor - G273 - , Removing and Installing" .

4.

Driver Door Contact Switch - F2 - Inside the Driver Central Locking Lock Unit - F220 - Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.57 [Door Components; Overview -Door Components] .

5.

Rear Lid Lock Unit - F256 - Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep Gr 55 [Rear Lid; Overview - Hood]

6.

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

39 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 268: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

The Alarm Horn - H12 - is located inside the plenum chamber on the right side next to the wiper unit.The anti-theft alarm system must be deactivated in order to remove the Alarm Horn - H12 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Anti-Theft AlarmSystem, Deactivating and Activating" .

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm system. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Anti-Theft Alarm System, Deactivating and Activating" .

Remove the plenum chamber cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.50 [Bulkhead; Overview - Plenum Chamber Cover] .

Release and disconnect the connector » -2- .

Remove the nut » -3- and remove the Alarm Horn - H12 - » -1- from theplenum chamber.

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Interior Monitoring"

Anti-Theft Alarm System, ActivatingAnti-theft alarm system is automatically switched on by locking the vehicle. Anti-theft alarm system is then activated immediately.So that anti-theft alarm system does not trigger unnecessary alarms, close all windows and doors before locking the vehicle.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

40 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 269: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Anti-Theft Alarm System, DeactivatingThe anti-theft alarm system is deactivated if

The vehicle is unlocked using the unlock button on the remote control key

The ignition is switched on.

Unlocking Vehicle Mechanically (Emergency Opening)Lock the vehicle on the driver door.

Anti-theft alarm system remains activated, however no alarm is triggered.Turn on the ignition within 15 seconds.

The alarm will go off after 15 seconds if the ignition is not turned on.By switching on the ignition, the electronic immobilizer recognizes a valid vehicle key and deactivates the anti-theft alarm system.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Removing the Front Interior Lamp - W1 - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing" .

Unclip the sensors » -3- .

Loosen the cable from the cable guide » -4- .

Remove the Interior Monitoring Sensor - G273 - » -1- and the sensors »-3- from the Front Interior Lamp - W1 - .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

41 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 270: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Anti-Theft Immobilizer Control Module, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil, Removing and Installing"

The Anti-theft Immobilizer Control Module - J362 - is integrated into the instrument cluster. If the Anti-Theft Immobilizer ControlModule - J362 - is faulty, the instrument cluster must be replaced.Instrument cluster, removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Instrument Cluster - KX2 - , Removing and Installing" .

⇒ Chapter "Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil, Removing and Installing, Vehicle with Mechanical Ignition Lock"

⇒ Chapter "Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil, Removing and Installing, Vehicle with Electronic Ignition Lock"

Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil, Removing and Installing, Vehicle with Mechanical Ignition Lock

The Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil - D2 - is integrated in the lock cylinder and cannot be replaced separately.

Lock cylinder, removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Ignition/Starter Switch, Removing and Installing" .

Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil, Removing and Installing, Vehicle with Electronic Ignition Lock

RemovingAdjust the steering wheel as far downward and to the rear as possible. Use the entire adjustment range of the steering columnadjustment for this.

Remove the lower steering column trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr.68 [Storage Compartments and Covers; LowerSteering Column Trim Panel, Removing and Installing] .

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

42 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 271: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Pry out the induction coil » -2- in the direction of the » -arrow A- from themount » -1- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Press the reader coil into the mount until it engages audibly.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Trim Removal Wedge - 3409 -

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

43 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 272: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

44 of 44 1/30/2019 11:03 AM

Page 273: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Overview - Windshield Washer System"

⇒ Chapter "Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Washer Nozzles, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Washer Nozzles, Adjusting"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

1 of 8 1/30/2019 10:46 AM

Page 274: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Right Windshield Washer Spray NozzleRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Washer Nozzles,Removing and Installing" .Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Washer Nozzles, Adjusting" .

1.

Left Windshield Washer Spray NozzleRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Washer Nozzles,Removing and Installing" .Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Washer Nozzles, Adjusting" .

2.

Washer Fluid HoseHose repair. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Washer Fluid Hoses, Servicing" .

3.

Filler NeckRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Washer Fluid Reservoir,Removing and Installing" .

4.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield WasherFluid Level Sensor, Removing and Installing" .

5.

Windshield Washer Pump - V5 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield WasherPump, Removing and Installing" .

6.

Washer Fluid ReservoirRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Washer Fluid Reservoir,Removing and Installing" .

7.

No IllustrationWindshield washer fluid reservoir to body: 8 Nm

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

2 of 8 1/30/2019 10:46 AM

Page 275: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Wrench 1331 5-50Nm - VAG1331 -

Drip Tray

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the bolt » -1- .

Remove the filler neck » -2- from the connecting pipe » -3- of thereservoir.

Unclip the hose bracket from the filler neck » -2- and remove it from thevehicle.

Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.63 [Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and Installing] .

Place a Drip Tray under the washer fluid reservoir.

Release and disconnect the connector » -3- from the Windshield WasherPump - V5 - .

Release and remove the washer fluid hose from the Windshield WasherPump - V5 - .

Release and disconnect the connector » -4- from the Windshield WasherFluid Level Sensor - G33 - .

Remove the wiring harness from the washer fluid reservoir » -1- .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

3 of 8 1/30/2019 10:46 AM

Page 276: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the bolt » -2- .

Remove the nuts » -5- .

Remove the washer fluid reservoir » -1- from the threaded pins andremove.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

The locating tab on the bottom of the filler neck must be inserted into thehole » -arrow- .

The connecting pipe » -1- and filler neck » -2- are joined so that theguides » -arrows- interlock.

Tightening Specifications

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

4 of 8 1/30/2019 10:46 AM

Page 277: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Windshield Washer System"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Drip Tray

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.63 [Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing andInstalling] .

Place a Drip Tray under the washer fluid reservoir.

Release and disconnect the Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33 - connector » -2- .

Pull the Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor - G33 - » -2- out of therubber seal on the washer fluid reservoir » -1- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

5 of 8 1/30/2019 10:46 AM

Page 278: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Drip Tray

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.63 [Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing andInstalling] .

Place a Drip Tray under the washer fluid reservoir.

Release and disconnect the connector » -3- from the Windshield WasherPump - V5 - .

Release and remove the washer fluid hose from the Windshield WasherPump - V5 - .

Remove the Windshield Washer Pump - V5 - » -2- upward from thewasher fluid reservoir » -1- .

Installing

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

6 of 8 1/30/2019 10:46 AM

Page 279: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Install in reverse order of removal.

RemovingOpen the hood.

Push the spray nozzle upward » -arrow A- and tilt it out from under thehood » -arrow B- .

Release the hose clip » -1- in the direction of the » -arrow- and removethe hose connection » -2- from the spray nozzle » -4- .

Release and disconnect the connector » -3- and remove the spray nozzle» -4- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:When connecting the washer fluid line, ensure that the clip engages audibly into the connection.

Starting at the top, slide the spray nozzle into the installation opening until it engages audibly.

Adjust the spray nozzles. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Washer Nozzles, Adjusting" .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

7 of 8 1/30/2019 10:46 AM

Page 280: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

There is a risk of damage.

Do not use any objects to clean the washer nozzles!

Remove the washer nozzle if the spraying field is uneven due to dirt in the nozzle, and flush the nozzle out with water opposite thespray direction. It is then permitted to blow compressed air opposite the spray direction. Do not use any objects to clean the washernozzles.

Adjusting washer nozzles for front windshield washer system. Refer to ⇒ Booklet14.3 [Procedure Descriptions] .

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

8 of 8 1/30/2019 10:46 AM

Page 281: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Puller - Wiper Arm Kit - T10369 -

- T10369/1 -

Removing

Risk of damaging the wiper arm shaft.

The wiper arm shaft can get damaged when removing the windshield wiper arms without using the - T10369/1 - .

If the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - is to be run during the work procedure, the hood must be closed, otherwise the voltage supplyof the Windshield Wiper Motor - V - will be interrupted.

Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Pry out the caps » -arrows- using a screwdriver.

Loosen the nuts » -arrows- several turns.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

1 of 2 1/30/2019 10:45 AM

Page 282: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Position the - T10369/1 - on the windshield wiper arm » -1- as shown.

Position the thrust piece » -2- on the wiper arm shaft.

Rotate the bolt » -3- clockwise until the wiper arm » -1- is removed fromthe wiper arm shaft.

Remove the nut completely and remove the windshield wiper arm » -1- .

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Adjust the windshield wiper arms. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting" .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

2 of 2 1/30/2019 10:45 AM

Page 283: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

RemovingBring the windshield wiper into the service position. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper, Bringing into Service Position" .

Risk of damaging the wiper blade.

Joint-free windshield wipers are very flexible. Only grasp the wiper blades in the area for the wiper blade mount to lift themaway from the windshield.

Lift the windshield wiper arm off the windshield.

Press the clip in direction of » -arrow A- and slide the wiper blade » -1-off of the windshield wiper arm » -2- in direction of » -arrow B- .

Remove the wiper blade » -1- .

Installing

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

1 of 2 1/30/2019 10:45 AM

Page 284: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

There is a risk of damaging the body.

The driver and front passenger side wiper blades are different lengths.

Install in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:Guide the wiper blade » -1- parallel into the windshield wiper arm » -2- indirection of » -arrow- . Make sure to slide the wiper blade » -1- on until theclips audibly lock in the wiper arm » -2- .

To leave the “service position:”Operate the windshield wiper switch.

OrDrive the vehicle faster than 6 km/h (3.7 mph).

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

2 of 2 1/30/2019 10:45 AM

Page 285: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Wrench 1410 - VAG1410 -If the control module is being replaced, select the Replacing function for the respective control module in Guided Fault Findingusing the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester .

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Remove the windshield wiper arms. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing" .

Remove the plenum chamber cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr.50 [Bulkhead; Overview - Bulkhead] .

Release and disconnect the connector » -1- .

Remove the bolts and nut » -arrows- .

Pivot the wiper frame » -2- upward out of the vehicle.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Adjust the windshield wiper arms. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting" .

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Overview - Windshield Wiper System"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

1 of 1 1/30/2019 10:45 AM

Page 286: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Component Location Overview - Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes"

⇒ Chapter "E-Box, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Relay and Fuse Panels in E-Box, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Relay and Fuse Panel Behind Instrument Panel on Driver Side, Removing and Installing"

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

1 of 13 1/30/2019 11:06 AM

Page 287: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Relay Panel on Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Relay Panel on VehicleElectrical System Control Module - J519 - , Removing and Installing" .

1.

Fuse Panel Behind the Instrument Panel on the Driver SideRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Fuse Panel behindDriver Side Instrument Panel, Removing and Installing" .

2.

Bolt3 NmQuantity: 2

3.

Nut6 NmQuantity: 2

4.

E-BoxRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "E-Box, Removing andInstalling" .

5.

Bolt6 Nm

6.

Relay and Fuse Panel in the E-boxRemoving and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Relay and Fuse Panelsin E-Box, Removing and Installing" .

7.

No IllustrationNuts (wire connections to the E-box): 9 Nm

Special tools and workshop equipment required

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

2 of 13 1/30/2019 11:06 AM

Page 288: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Torque Wrench 1410 - VAG1410 -

This procedure contains mandatory replaceable parts. Refer to component overview prior to starting procedure.

Mandatory Replacement PartsShear bolts - E-box

RemovingDisconnect the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting" .

Press the catches in direction of » -arrow- and remove the cover from theE-box » -2- .

Disconnect the wires » -2- .

Remove the wires from the connecting pins.

CAUTION

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

3 of 13 1/30/2019 11:06 AM

Page 289: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Press the tabs » -arrows- on the relay and fuse panel » -1- .

Remove the relay and fuse panel » -1- from the E-box.

Remove the Engine Control Module - J623 - » -2- and bracket » -1- offthe E-box. To do this, first remove the shear bolts » -arrows- .

Engine Control Module - J623 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Rep.Gr.24 [Engine Control Module; Engine Control ModuleJ623, Removing andInstalling] .

Remove the bolt » -2- on the E-Box » -3- .

Remove the nuts » -1- .

Remove the E-box » -3- from the vehicle.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Connect the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting" .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

4 of 13 1/30/2019 11:06 AM

Page 290: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Then check if the cover » -1- from the E-box is correctly engaged.

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Component Location Overview - Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes"

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Wrench 1410 - VAG1410 -

RemovingDisconnect the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting" .

Press the catches in the direction of the » -arrow- and remove the coverfrom the E-box » -1- .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

5 of 13 1/30/2019 11:06 AM

Page 291: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Disconnect the wires » -2- .

Remove the wires from the connecting pins.

Press the tabs » -arrows- on the relay and fuse panel » -1- .

Remove the relay and fuse panel » -1- from the E-box.

InstallingInstall in the reverse order of removal while noting the following:

Connect the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting" .

Then check if the cover » -1- from the E-box is correctly engaged.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

6 of 13 1/30/2019 11:06 AM

Page 292: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Tightening SpecificationsRefer to ⇒ Chapter "Component Location Overview - Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes"

⇒ Chapter "Fuse Panel behind Driver Side Instrument Panel, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Relay Panel on Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - , Removing and Installing"

Fuse Panel behind Driver Side Instrument Panel, Removing and InstallingSpecial tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -

RemovingDisconnect the Battery - A - . Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting" .

Open the driver side fuse panel cover.

Remove the bolts » -1- and guide the fuse panel » -2- downward.

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal..

Tightening Specifications

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

7 of 13 1/30/2019 11:06 AM

Page 293: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Component Location Overview - Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes"

Relay Panel on Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - , Removing and InstallingThe relay panel on the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - is attached to the instrument panel central tube andcannot be removed without removing the instrument panel.The individual relay sockets can be removed without having to remove the relay panel.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Open the driver side fuse panel cover.

Remove the relay from the relay panel.

The number of relays is dependent on vehicle equipment.

Clip the tabs » -arrows- toward the outside and push the connector » -2-through the relay panel » -1- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

8 of 13 1/30/2019 11:06 AM

Page 294: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

⇒ Chapter "Component Location Overview - Control Modules"

⇒ Chapter "Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Converter Box - J935 - , Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Garage Door Opener Control Module, Removing and Installing"

⇒ Chapter "Data Bus on Board Diagnostic Interface - J533 - , Removing and Installing"

Converter Box - J935 - Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Converter Box - J935 - , Removing and Installing" .

1.

Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - The Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface - J533 - is integrated inthe Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - .Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Vehicle ElectricalSystem Control Module - J519 - , Removing and Installing" .

2.

Not Installed3.

The Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface - J533 - is integrated in the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - .

The Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - is clipped in from below on the relay panel.

NOTE

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

9 of 13 1/30/2019 11:06 AM

Page 295: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

If the control module is being replaced, select the Replacing function for the respective control module in Guided Fault Findingusing the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

If equipped, remove the driver side footwell cover.

Loosen the locking mechanisms » -3- and push the Vehicle ElectricalSystem Control Module - J519 - » -2- in the direction of the » -arrow- .

Remove the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - » -2-downward at the same time.

Release and disconnect the connectors » -1- .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

The Converter Box - J935 - converts the activation signal for the Ignition/Starter Switch - D - , the steering column lock and theVehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - into the load current used to activate the terminal control.The Converter Box - J935 - together with the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - also actuates the repeat ignitionlock.The Converter Box - J935 - is found in the relay panel at the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - .

RemovingTurn off the ignition and all electrical equipment and remove the ignition key.

Open the driver side fuse panel cover.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

10 of 13 1/30/2019 11:06 AM

Page 296: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Remove the Converter Box - J935 - » -1- from the relay panel.

Current relay assignments. Refer to ⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting &Component locations .

InstallingInstall in reverse order of removal.

The Garage Door Opener Control Module - J530 - is found in the Garage Door Opener Control Head - E284 - in the sun visor.Garage Door Opener Control Head - E284 - , Removing and Installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Garage Door Opener ControlHead - E284 - , Removing and Installing" .

The Data Bus on Board Diagnostic Interface - J533 - is integrated in the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - andcannot be replaced separately.

Vehicle Electrical System Control Module - J519 - , removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Vehicle Electrical SystemControl Module - J519 - , Removing and Installing" .

⇒ Chapter "Wiring Harnesses and Connectors, Repairing"

Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr.97 [Connectors] .

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

11 of 13 1/30/2019 11:06 AM

Page 297: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr.97 [Connector Housings, Releasing and Disassembling] .

Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr.97 [Antenna Wires, Repairing] .

Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr.97 [Vehicle Diagnostic Tester] .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Torque Wrench 1410 - VAG1410 -

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

12 of 13 1/30/2019 11:06 AM

Page 298: Battery with »Standard« Color Displaytransportation.centennialcollege.ca/pd/tatc/beetle/electricaloverviewrepair.pdfchapter on battery testing. Refer to ⇒ Chapter "Battery, Checking"

Torque Screwdriver - VAG1624 -

DRUCK NUMBER: K0059092721

FactoryEdition

EditEdition

Job Type Feedback Notes QualityCheckedBy

03.2018 05/04/2018 FactoryUpdate

N/A Juan S.

07.2017 03/08/2018 LocalFactoryFeedback

1321219 Added calibrationcondition to BlindSpot Detection

Tom Perry

07.2017 07/26/2017 Factoryupdate

N/A Eric P.

07.2016 09/15/2016 LinkChecking

N/A Eric P.

07.2016 07/14/2016 FactoryNew

N/A Joe Y.

https://www-qa.vwhub.com/e2gwebjct/index.html#/tabs/tab-3/infomedia

13 of 13 1/30/2019 11:06 AM